Portable LCD Projector
Models 8776
Model 8776-RJ
Model 8755E-RJ
User's Manual
#070035
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Projector
8755E-RJ, 8776 & 8776RJ
User's Manual – Operating Guide
Thank you for purchasing this projector.
WARNING ►Before using this product, please read this manual
and related manuals to ensure the proper use of this product.
After reading, store them in a safe place for future reference.
About this manual
Various symbols are used in this manual. The meanings of these symbols are
described below.
WARNING This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly
result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling.
CAUTION This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly
result in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect
handling.
Please refer to the pages written following this symbol.
NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual.
• The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted
without express written consent.
Trademark acknowledgment
• VGA and XGA are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• Apple and Mac are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
• VESA and SVGA are trademarks of Video Electronics Standard Association.
• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.
ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Information Sec. . . . 1-17
Network Functions Section . . . 1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Projector features / Preparations
Projector features
This projector is used to project various computer signals as well as NTSC/PAL/
SECAM, Component (SD, HD) video signals onto a screen. It requires a small
space for installation and produces a large image at a short throw distance.
High Brightness
Newly developed ꢁ00W UHB (Ultra High Brightness) lamp gives you a brighter
image on the screen. The image is bright enough for use in fully lighted
rooms.
Low Noise
WHISPER mode is available for reducing acoustic noise and quieter
operation. It is perfect for use in dimly lighted rooms where low noise is more
important than brightness.
Rich Connectivity
This projector has a variety of I/O ports. It can be easily connected to many
signal sources like PC, DVD and so on. The rich connectivity provides you
more options for an impressive presentation.
Compact Body
Even with its many features, this projector has a small form factor.
Preparations
About contents of package
Your projector should come with items indicated on literature sheet.
Contact your dealer immediately if anything is missing.
NOTE • Keep the original packing materials for future reshipment. When
moving the projector, be sure to use the original packing materials. Use special
caution for the lens part.
Fastening the lens cover
To avoid losing the lens cover, please fasten the lens cap to the projector using
the strap.
Strap ring
Strap
Bottom side
Strap hole
ꢀ. Fix the strap to the strap ring of the lens cover.
Put the strap into the groove on the rivet.
ꢁ.
3.
Push the rivet into the strap hole.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part names
Part names
Projector
ê
Control buttons ( 6)
Lamp cover ( 54)
Remote sensor ( 16)
(Lamp unit is inside.)
Speaker
Zoom ring ( 19)
Security bar ( 10)
Focus ring ( 19)
(Use for attaching a
commercial anti-theft
chain or wire.)
Vent
Elevator button ( 9)
Lens ( 17)
Elevator foot ( 9)
Front-Right side
Lens cover ( 3)
Filter cover ( 55)
ê
(Air filter and intake vent
are inside.)
N
E
OP
E
CLOS
B
U S
T
O U
O
L
O
U D I
A
R
T
C O N T
O U
B
R G
2
I N
B
O
N
R G
2
L A
1
I N
S - V I D E
V I
I N
O
O
U D I
A
E O
D
1
U D I
I N
A
B
R G
R
/ P
R C
B
/ P
B C
3
U D I O I N
A
Y
Bottom side
WARNING ►During use or immediately after use, do not touch around the
lamp and vents of the projector. (ê) It could cause a burn.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part names
Power switch ( 17)
AC inlet ( 14)
CB
C
/PB
R/PR
VI
RGB IN
1
A
UDIO IN
D
A
1
EO
UDIO IN
S-VI
2
D
EO
RGB IN
LA
Elevator button ( 9)
N
2
RG
B
OU
C
A
IN
Ports (See below.)
CO
T
NT
R
A
OL
UDIO OU
T
US
B
Elevator foot ( 9)
Vent
Rear-Left side
AUDIO INꢀ port ( 12)
(In the default setting, the AUDIO INꢀ port is the audio
port for the RGB INꢀ port, however, it is possible to
AUDIO IN3 L/R port ( 13)
change the settings. 36)
(In the default setting, the
AUDIO IN3 L/R port is the audio
port for the VIDEO, S-VIDEO
and COMPONENT VIDEO
RGB INꢀ port ( 12)
Restart switch (*) ( 62)
ports, however it is possible to
RJ Only
change the settings. 36)
RGB INꢁ port ( 12)
LAN port ( 12)
Used for Ethernet
input/output.
LAN
COMPONENT
AUDIO IN3
R
VIDEO ports ( 13)
Y
This port is used
when utilizing
Y
RGB IN1
RGB IN2
RGB OUT AUDIO OUT
CB/PB
network functions.
AUDIO IN1
C
B
R
/
/
P
B
R
L
CR/PR
AUDIO IN2
C
P
CONTROL
AUDIO OUT port
K
USB
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
VIDEO port ( 13)
(
12)
Ports
S-VIDEO port ( 13)
RGB OUT port ( 12)
AUDIO INꢁ port ( 12)
(In the default setting, the AUDIO
INꢁ port is the audio port for
USB port ( 12)
CONTROL port ( 12)
the RGB INꢁ port, however, it is
possible to change the settings.
Kensington lock slot
36)
NOTE (*) About Restart switch: This projector is controlled by an internal
microprocessor. Under certain exceptional circumstances, the projector may not
operate correctly and the microprocessor will need to be reset. In such a case,
please push the Restart switch by using a cocktail stick or similar, and before
turning on again, make the projector cool down at least ꢀ0 minutes without
operating. Only push the Restart switch in these exceptional instances.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part names
Control buttons
LAMP indicator ( 60, 61)
TEMP indicator ( 60, 61)
Cursor buttons
POWER indicator ( 17, 60, 61)
▲,▼,◄,► ( 24)
STANDBY/ON button
(
17)
INPUT button ( 18)
Remote control
SEARCH button ( 19)
STANDBY/ON button ( 17)
RGB button ( 18)
AUTO button ( 20)
SEARCH
AUTO
VIDEO
RGB
VIDEO button ( 19)
BLANK button ( 22)
BLANK
ASPECT
ASPECT button ( 19)
PAGE UP button ( 23)
MAGNIFY
PAGE UP
VOLUME
MUTE
HOME
END
ON
HOME button ( 23)
VOLUME button ( 18)
PAGE DOWN
MAGNIFY
OFF
MUTE button ( 18)
ON button ( 21)
FREEZE
MY BUTTON
KEYSTONE
OFF button ( 21)
1
2
PAGE DOWN button ( 23)
END button ( 23)
KEYSTONE button ( 21)
MENU
FREEZE button ( 22)
POSITION
MY BUTTON button ( 41)
MENU button ( 24)
POSITION button ( 20)
ENTER
Cursor buttons
ESC button ( 23)
RESET
ESC
▲,▼,◄,► ( 24)
ENTER button ( 24)
RESET button ( 24)
Battery cover ( 15)
(on the back)
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Setting up
WARNING ►Place the projector in a stable position horizontally. A fall or
a turnover could cause an injury and/or damage to the projector. Then using
damaged projector could result in a fire and/or an electric shock.
• Do not place the projector on an unstable, slant or vibrant surface such as a
wobbly or inclined stand.
• Do not place the projector in the side/front/rear-up position, except cleaning
the air filter.
►Place the projector in a cool place, and pay attention enough to ventilation.
The high temperature of the projector could cause a fire, a burn and/or
malfunction to the projector.
• Do not stop up, block and cover the projector's vents.
• Keep a space of 30 cm or more between the sides and other objects such as
walls.
• Do not place the projector on a metallic thing or anything weak in heat.
• Do not place the projector on a carpet, cushion or bedding.
• Do not place the projector in direct sunlight or near a hot object such as a
heater.
• Put nothing about lens and vents of the projector. Put nothing on the projector.
• Put nothing that is sucked or sticks to the bottom of projector. This projector
has some intake vents also on the bottom.
►Do not place the projector on the place that gets wet. Damping the projector
or inserting liquid in the projector could cause a fire, an electric shock and/or
malfunction to the projector.
• Do not place the projector in a bathroom or the outdoors.
• Put nothing containing the liquid near the projector.
CAUTION ►Avoid a smoky, humid or dusty place. Placing the projector
in such place could cause a fire, an electric shock and/or malfunction to the
projector.
• Do not place the projector near a humidifier, a smoking space or a kitchen.
►Adjust the position of the projector to prevent any strong light, like direct
sunlight or inverter fluorescent lamp light, from hitting the projector's remote
sensor.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Arrangement
Refer to the illustrations and tables below to determine the screen size and projection distance.
The values shown in the table are calculated for a full size screen: ꢀ0ꢁ4×768
(a) The screen size (diagonal)
(b)
(b) Distance from the projector to the screen (±ꢀ0%)
(c) The height of the screen (±ꢀ0%)
(c) up
4:3
(a)
ꢀ6:9
(a)
(c) down
4 : 3 screen
ꢀ6 : 9 screen
(a) Screen
(b) Projection distance
[m (inch)]
min. max.
(c) Screen height
(b) Projection distance
(c) Screen height
size
[cm (inch)]
[m (inch)]
min.
[cm (inch)]
[inch (m)]
down
up
max.
down
-ꢀ (0)
up
30 (0.8) 0.9 (34) ꢀ.ꢀ (4ꢀ)
40 (ꢀ.0) ꢀ.ꢁ (46) ꢀ.4 (56)
50 (ꢀ.3) ꢀ.5 (58) ꢀ.8 (70)
60 (ꢀ.5) ꢀ.8 (70) ꢁ.ꢀ (84)
ꢀ.0 (38) ꢀ.ꢀ (45)
5
(ꢁ)
(ꢁ)
(3)
(4)
4ꢀ (ꢀ6)
39 (ꢀ5)
6
8
9
55 (ꢁꢁ) ꢀ.3 (50) ꢀ.5 (6ꢀ) -ꢁ (-ꢀ) 5ꢀ (ꢁ0)
69 (ꢁ7) ꢀ.6 (63) ꢀ.9 (76) -ꢁ (-ꢀ) 64 (ꢁ5)
8ꢁ (3ꢁ) ꢀ.9 (76) ꢁ.3 (9ꢀ) -ꢁ (-ꢀ) 77 (30)
96 (38) ꢁ.3 (89) ꢁ.7 (ꢀ07) -3 (-ꢀ) 90 (35)
70 (ꢀ.8) ꢁ.ꢀ (8ꢀ) ꢁ.5 (98) ꢀꢀ (4)
80 (ꢁ.0) ꢁ.4 (93) ꢁ.8 (ꢀꢀꢁ) ꢀꢁ (5) ꢀꢀ0 (43) ꢁ.6 (ꢀ0ꢁ) 3.ꢀ (ꢀꢁꢁ) -3 (-ꢀ) ꢀ03 (4ꢀ)
90 (ꢁ.3) ꢁ.7 (ꢀ05) 3.ꢁ (ꢀꢁ6) ꢀ4 (5) ꢀꢁ3 (49) ꢁ.9 (ꢀꢀ5) 3.5 (ꢀ38) -4 (-ꢀ) ꢀꢀ6 (46)
ꢀ00 (ꢁ.5) 3.0 (ꢀꢀ7) 3.6 (ꢀ40) ꢀ5 (6) ꢀ37 (54) 3.ꢁ (ꢀꢁ7) 3.9 (ꢀ53) -4 (-ꢁ) ꢀꢁ9 (5ꢀ)
ꢀꢁ0 (3.0) 3.6 (ꢀ40) 4.3 (ꢀ69) ꢀ8 (7) ꢀ65 (65) 3.9 (ꢀ53) 4.7 (ꢀ84) -5 (-ꢁ) ꢀ54 (6ꢀ)
ꢀ50 (3.8) 4.5 (ꢀ76) 5.4 (ꢁꢀꢀ) ꢁ3 (9) ꢁ06 (8ꢀ) 4.9 (ꢀ9ꢁ) 5.8 (ꢁ30) -6 (-ꢁ) ꢀ93 (76)
ꢁ00 (5.ꢀ) 6.0 (ꢁ35) 7.ꢁ (ꢁ8ꢁ) 30 (ꢀꢁ) ꢁ74 (ꢀ08) 6.5 (ꢁ56) 7.8 (307) -8 (-3) ꢁ57 (ꢀ0ꢀ)
ꢁ50 (6.4) 7.5 (ꢁ94) 9.0 (353) 38 (ꢀ5) 343 (ꢀ35) 8.ꢀ (3ꢁ0) 9.8 (384) -ꢀ0 (-4) 3ꢁꢁ (ꢀꢁ7)
300 (7.6) 9.0 (35ꢁ) ꢀ0.8 (4ꢁ3) 46 (ꢀ8) 4ꢀꢀ (ꢀ6ꢁ) 9.8 (384) ꢀꢀ.7 (46ꢀ) -ꢀꢁ (-5) 386 (ꢀ5ꢁ)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Adjusting the projector's elevator
CAUTION ►If you press the elevator button without holding the projector,
the projector might crash down, overturn, smash your fingers and possibly
result in malfunction. To prevent damaging the projector and injuring yourself,
always hold the projector whenever using the elevator buttons to adjust the
elevator feet.
►Do not incline the projector rightward or leftward. Also do not incline it
backward or forward exceeding 30 degrees. Exceeding these range could
cause malfunction, and could shorten the lifetime of the consumables.
►Except for inclining by the elevator feet adjustment, place the projector
horizontally.
You can use the elevator feet to make adjustments if the surface on which you
need to set the projector is uneven or if you otherwise need to adjust the angle of
projection. The adjustment range of the elevator feet is 0 to 9 degrees.
Elevator feet
Elevator button
After making sure that the projector is cool adequately, press and hold in the
elevator buttons while holding the projector.
The elevator buttons and the elevator feet are on the both sides.
ꢀ.
ꢁ.
3.
Raise or lower the projector to the desired height and release the elevator
buttons.
When you release the elevator buttons, the elevator feet will lock into position.
If necessary, you can also finely adjust the height of the projector by twisting
the elevator feet by hand.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Using the Security Bar
WARNING ►Do not use the security bar to prevent the projector from
falling. Dropping or knocking over the projector may cause damage or injury.
CAUTION ►The security bar is not a comprehensive theft prevention
measure. It is intended to be used as an extra theft prevention measure.
A commercial anti-theft chain or wire can be attached to the security bar on the
projector.
How to attach
ꢀ.
An anti-theft chain or wire can be
attached as shown in the illustration.
(Anti-theft chains or wires of up to
N
LA
ꢀ0mm in diameter can be used)
T
OU
O
UDI
A
T
OU
B
RG
2
RGB IN
1
B
IN
1
US
B
OL
R
RG
O
IN
CONT
R
L
UDI
A
Y
2
IN
O
UDI
A
/PB
/PR
CB
CR
O
VIDE
EO
D
S-VI
Security Bar
Anti-theft chain or wire
[sold separately]
ꢀ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Connecting your devices
CAUTION ►Turn off all devices prior to connecting them to the projector.
Attempting to connect a live device to the projector may generate extremely
loud noises or other abnormalities that may result in malfunction and/or damage
to the device and/or projector.
►Use the accessory cable or a designated-type cable for the connection.
Some cables have to be used with core set. A too long cable may cause a
certain picture degradation. Please consult with your dealer for details. For
cables that have a core only at one end, connect the core to the projector.
►Make sure that you connect devices to the correct port. Incorrect connection
may result in malfunction and/or damage to the device and/or projector.
NOTE • Whenever attempting to connect a laptop computer to the projector, be sure
to activate the laptop’s RGB external image output (set the laptop to CRT display or to
simultaneous LCD and CRT display). For details on how this is done, please refer to the
instruction manual of the corresponding laptop computer.
• Secure the screws on the connectors and tighten.
• Some computers may have multiple display screen modes. Use of some of these
modes will not be possible with this projector.
• For some RGB signal modes, the optional Mac adapter is necessary.
• When the image resolution is changed on a computer, depending on an input,
automatic adjustment function may take some time and may not be completed. In this
case, you may not be able to see a check box to select “Yes/No” for the new resolution
on Windows. Then the resolution will go back to the original. It might be recommended
to use other CRT or LCD monitors to change the resolution.
About Plug-and-Play capability
Plug-and-Play is a system composed of the computer, its operating system and
peripheral equipment (i.e. display devices). This projector is compatible with VESA DDC
ꢁB. Plug-and-Play can be achieved by connecting this projector to a computer is VESA
DDC (display data channel) compatible.
• Please take advantage of this function by connecting the accessory RGB cable to the
RGB INꢀ port (DDC ꢁB compatible). Plug-and-Play may not work properly if any other
type of connection is attempted.
• Please use the standard drivers in your computer as this projector is a Plug-and-Play
monitor.
ꢀꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Examples of connection with a computer
* In the default setting, the AUDIO INꢀ port is the audio port for the RGB INꢀ, and the
AUDIO INꢁ port is the audio port for the RGB INꢁ ports. To change the settings, refer to the
AUDIO item in the SETUP menu. ( 36)
RGB cable
USB cable
LAN
AUDIO IN3
R
Y
RGB IN1
RGB IN2
B OUT AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN1
CB/PB
CR/PR
L
ADIO IN2
RGB out Audio out RS-ꢁ3ꢁC USB
C
K
USB
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
RS-ꢁ3ꢁC cable
Stereo mini
audio cable
Stereo mini audio cable
LAN
AUDIO IN3
R
RGB out
Audio out
Y
RGB IN1
R2
RGB OUT AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN1
CB/PB
CR/PR
L
AUDIO IN2
ORO
K
USB
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
RGB cable
Connecting to a monitor (output) and a speaker with amplitier (output)
LAN
AUDIO IN3
R
Y
Audio in
RGB IN1
RGB IN2
RGB OUT AUDIO OUT
RGB in
AUDIO IN1
CB/PB
CR/PR
L
AUDIO IN2
CONTROL
K
USB
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
RGB cable
Stereo mini audio cable
Connecting to a Network
LAN
AUDIO IN3
R
Y
RGB IN1
RGB IN2
RGB OUT AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN1
CB/PB
CR/PR
LAN
L
AUDIO IN2
CONTROL
K
USB
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
LAN cable
(CAT-5 cable)
CAUTION ►For safety, do not connect LAN port to any network that might
have the excessive voltage.
ꢀꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Examples of connection with a VCR/DVD player
*
In the default setting, the AUDIO IN3 L/R port is the audio port for the VIDEO, S-VIDEO
and COMPONENT VIDEO ports. To change the settings, refer to the AUDIO item in the
SETUP menu. ( 36)
LAN
Audio/Video cable
AUDIO IN3
R
Y
RGB IN1
RGB IN2
RGB OUT AUDIO OUT
Audio (R) out
AUDIO IN1
CB/PB
CRPR
L
AUDIO IN2
CONTROL
Audio (L) out
Video out
K
USB
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
LAN
Audio cable
AUDIO IN3
R
Y
Audio (R) out
RGB IN1
RGB IN2
RGB OUT AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN1
CB/PB
CR/PR
L
AUDIO IN2
Audio (L) out
S-Video out
CONTROL
K
USB
VIDEO
S-
S-Video cable
Component video out
Y
LAN
Component video cable
AUDIO IN3
Y
R
RGB IN1
RGB IN2
CB/PB
CR/PR
RGB OUT AUDIO OUT
UIO IN1
CB/PB
CR/PR
L
AUDIO IN2
CONTROL
K
USB
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Audio (R) out
Audio cable
Audio (L) out
LAN
AUDIO IN3
R
G
Y
SCART cable
RGB IN1
RGB IN2
RGB OUT AUDIO OUT
B
R
AUDIO IN1
C
B
/
/
P
B
L
AUDIO IN2
CR
PR
CONTROL
K
USB
VIDEO
SDEO
SCART
out
Video
Note: Only the RJ has the LAN connector port.
ꢀ3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Connecting power supply
WARNING ►Please use extra caution when connecting the power cord, as
incorrect or faulty connections may result in fire and/or electrical shock.
• Only use the power cord that came with the projector. If it is damaged, contact
your dealer to newly get correct one.
• Only plug the power cord into an outlet rated for use with the power cord's
specified voltage range.
• Never modify the power cord. Never attempt to defeat the ground connection
of the three-pronged plug.
AC inlet
CB
/PB
C
R/P
RGB IN
UDIO IN
A
VI
D
A
1
EO
S-VI
UDIO IN
1
2
D
EO
RGB IN
LA
N
2
RG
B
OU
C
A
IN
CO
NT
T
R
OL
AUDIO OU
T
US
B
Connector
of the power cord
ꢀ. Connect the connector of the power cord to the AC inlet of the projector.
ꢁ. Firmly plug the power cord's plug into the outlet.
ꢀ4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control
Remote control
Putting batteries
WARNING ►Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as
directed. Battery may explode if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or
dispose of in fire.
And also improper use may result in cracking or leakage, which could result in
fire, injury and/or pollution of the surrounding environment.
• Be sure to use only the batteries specified. Do not use batteries of different
types at the same time. Do not mix a new battery with used one.
•
Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery.
• Keep a battery away from children and pets. If swallowed consult a physician
immediately for emergency treatment.
• Do not short circuit or solder a battery.
•
•
Do not allow a battery in a fire or water. Keep batteries in a dark, cool and dry place.
If you observe a leakage of a battery, wipe out the flower and then replace a battery.
If the liquid adheres to your body or clothes, rinse well with water immediately.
• Obey the local laws on disposing the battery.
Remove the battery cover.
Slide back and remove the battery cover in the direction of the arrow.
ꢀ.
Insert the batteries.
Align and insert the two AA batteries according to their plus and minus
terminals as indicated in the remote control.
ꢁ.
Close the battery cover.
Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow and snap it back into place.
3.
ꢀ5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control
Using the remote control
CAUTION ►Be careful in handling the remote control.
• Do not drop or expose the remote control to physical impact.
• Do not get the remote control wet or place it on wet objects. It may result in
malfunction.
• Remove the batteries from the remote control and store them in a safe place if
you won’t be using the remote control for an extended period.
• Replace the batteries whenever the remote control starts malfunctioning.
• When strong lights (such as direct sunlight) or light from an extremely close
range (such as from an inverter fluorescent lamp), hit the projector’s remote
sensor, the remote control may cause to function. Adjust the direction of the
projector to keep the light from directly hitting the projector’s remote sensor.
The signal settings for the remote control transmitter and the projector's remote sensor can be changed.
If the remote control does not function properly try changing the signal setting.
Changing the signal setting for the remote control transmitter
(ꢀ)Setting ꢀ (FREQ. : NORMAL)
Simultaneously press and hold the MUTE and RESET buttons for about 3 seconds.
(ꢁ)Setting ꢁ (FREQ. : HIGH)
Simultaneously press and hold the MAGNIFY OFF and ESC buttons for about 3 seconds.
• Setting ꢀ is the factory default setting.
• When the batteries are removed from the remote control, user-specified settings are
saved for about half a day. If the batteries are removed from the remote control for longer
than half a day, the remote will reset to Setting ꢀ.
Changing the signal setting for the projector's remote sensor
Switch between Setting ꢀ and ꢁ using the SERVICE/REMOTE FREQ. item found in
OPTION MENU. ( 43)
If the remote control does not seem to function properly, try changing the settings for the
remote control and the projector's remote sensor.
The remote control will not function properly if the remote control transmitter settings and
the projector's remote sensor settings are not the same.
The remote control works with the projector’s remote sensor.
approx. 3 meters
30º
30º
• The range of the remote sensor is 3 meters with a 60 degree range (30 degrees to the left
and right of the remote sensor).
• Also a remote signal reflected in the screen etc. may be available. If it is difficult to send a
remote signal to the sensor directly, please try to use the reflected signal.
• Since the remote control uses infrared light to send signals to the projector (Classꢀ
LED), be sure to use the remote control in an area free from obstacles that could block the
remote control’s output signal to the projector.
ꢀ6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power on/off
Power on/off
WARNING ►When the power is on, a strong light is emitted. Do not look into
the lens of projector. Also do not peep at the inside of projector through a hole.
NOTE • Turn the power on/off in right order. Please power on the projector prior
to the connected devices. Power off the projector later than the connected devices.
Turning on the power
POWER
indicator
STANDBY/ON
button
Make sure that the power cord is firmly and
ꢀ. correctly connected to the projector and the outlet.
VIDEO
RGB
SEARCH
ASPECT
AUTO
BLANK
Remove the lens cover, and set the power switch to
the ON position.
The power indicator will light up in steady orange. Then
wait several seconds because the buttons may not
function for these several seconds.
MAGNIFY
ꢁ.
HOME
END
PAGE UP
VOLUME
MUTE
ON
PAGE DOWN
OFF
FREEZE
MY BUTTON
1
KEYSTONE
2
POSITION
MENU
ENTER
ESC
RESET
CB
CR
/PB
/PR
VI
RGB IN
IO
A
UD
D
A
1
EO
UD
(1) When AUTO ON in the OPTION menu is set to TURN ON:
(
40)
IO
IN
IN
1
S-VI
2
D
R
G
B
I
N
EO
LA
N
2
RG
IN
B
O
C
A
CO
NT
UT
R
A
UD
IO
OL
OU
T
US
B
The lamp will only be automatically turned on when the
Power switch is turned on after the power was turned off by
Power switch last time. Afterwards the POWER indicator
will begin blinking in green. When the power is completely
on, the indicator will stop blinking and light in green.
POWER
(Steady orange)
POWER
(2) When AUTO ON in the OPTION menu is set to TURN OFF
please see step 3.
(Blinking in green)
Press the STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the
POWER
3. remote control.
(Steady green)
To display the picture, select an input signal according to the
section "Selecting an input signal" ( 18).
Turning off the power
Please pay special attention to below two points when you do:
(ꢀ) Please do not turn the projector on again for at least ꢀ0 minute in this case. Neglect
could shorten the lifetime of the lamp.
(ꢁ) During use or immediately after use, do not touch around the lamp and vents of the
projector ( 4 ê) It could cause a burn.
Press the STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the remote
ꢀ. control.
Power off?
The message "Power off?" will appear on the screen for about 5
seconds.
POWER
Press the STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the remote
ꢁ. control again while the message appears.
(Blinking in orange)
The projector lamp will go off, and the POWER indicator will begin
blinking in orange.
POWER
(Steady orange)
Then the POWER indicator will stop blinking and light in steady
orange when the lamp cooling is complete.
Make sure that the power indicator lights in steady orange, and set
3. the power switch to the OFF position. The POWER indicator will go
off. Attach the lens cover.
ꢀ7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Operating
Adjusting the volume
Press the VOLUME button on the remote control.
A dialog will appear on the screen to aid you in adjusting the volume.
ꢀ.
SEARCH
AUTO
VIDEO
RGB
BLANK
ASPECT
ꢁ. Use the cursor buttons ▲/▼ to adjust the volume.
MAGNIFY
HOME
END
PAGE UP
VOLUME
MU
ON
To close the dialog and complete the operation, press the
PAGE DOWN
VOLUME button again. Even if you don’t do anything, the
dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds.
BLANK
ASPECT
MAGNIFY
AUTO
Temporarily muting the sound
HOME
END
PAGE UP
VOLUME
MUTE
ON
Press the MUTE button on the remote control.
A dialog will appear on the screen indicating that you have muted the sound.
ꢀ.
PAGE DOWN
OFF
To restore the sound, press the MUTE or VOLUME button.
Even if you don’t do anything, the dialog will automatically
disappear after a few seconds.
FREEZE
MY BUTTON
1
KEYS
2
Selecting an input signal
Press the INPUT button on the projector.
Each time you press the button, the projector switches its
input port as below.
ꢀ.
RGB INꢀ
RGB INꢁ
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
CB
CR
/P
/PR
VI
RGB
UDIO ININ
1
A
D
A
EO
U
D
I
O
I
N
1
S-V
2
ID
EO
R
G
B
I
N
LA
N
2
R
G
B
OU
C
A
IN
CO
NT
T
R
A
UDIO OU
OL
T
US
B
Press the RGB button on the remote control to select an
input port for the RGB signal.
Each time you press the button, the projector switches its RGB
input port as below.
ꢀ.
SEARCH
AUTO
VIDEO
RGB
BLANK
ASPECT
RGB INꢀ
RGB INꢁ
● If the RGB button is pushed (when switching from VIDEO to RGB signals)
when TURN ON is selected for the AUTO SEARCH item in the OPTION menu
the projector will check the RGB IN1 port first. If no input is detected at the port,
the projector will check the RGB INꢁ port.
ꢀ8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Selecting an input signal (continued)
Press the VIDEO button on the remote control to select an
input for video signal.
Each time you press the button, the projector switches its
video input port as below.
ꢀ.
SEARCH
AUTO
VIDEO
RGB
BLANK
ASP
COMPONENT VIDEO
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
● If the VIDEO button is pushed (when switching from RGB to VIDEO signals)
when TURN ON is selected for the AUTO SEARCH item in the OPTION menu
the projector will check the COMPONENT VIDEO port first. If no input is
detected at the port, projector will begin to check other ports in above order.
Searching an input signal
SEARCH
AU
ꢀ. Press the SEARCH button on the remote control.
VIDEO
RGB
BLANK
ASPECT
The projector will start to check its input ports in order to
find any input signals.
When an input is found, the projector will stop searching and display the image.
If no signal is found, the projector will return to the state selected before the
operation.
RGB IN ꢀ
RGB IN ꢁ
COMPONENT VIDEO
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
Selecting an aspect ratio
Press the ASPECT button on the remote control.
Each time you press the button, the projector switches the mode for aspect
ratio in turn.
ꢀ.
For an RGB signal
NORMAL 4:3
ꢀ6:9
SMALL
SEARCH
AUTO
VIDEO
RGB
BLANK
VOLUME
ASPECT
For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal
MAGN
HOME
PAGE UP
ON
4:3
ꢀ6:9
ꢀ4:9
SMALL
For a no signal
4:3 (fixed)
● The NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio of the signal.
● Performing the automatic adjustment initializes the aspect ratio setting.
Zoom ring
Adjusting the zoom and focus
ꢀ. Use the zoom ring to adjust the screen size.
Focus ring
ꢁ. Use the focus ring to focus the picture.
ꢀ9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Using the automatic adjustment feature
ꢀ. Press the AUTO button on the remote control.
SEARCH
AUTO
VIDEO
RGB
HOME
For an RGB signal
BLANK
VOLUME
ASPECT
The vertical position, the horizontal position, the horizontal
phase and the horizontal size will be automatically adjusted.
MAGNIFY
PAG
ON
And the aspect ratio will be automatically set to default. Make sure that the
application window is set to its maximum size prior to attempting to use this
feature. A dark picture may still be incorrectly adjusted. Use a bright picture
when adjusting.
For a video signal or s-video signal
The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be selected
automatically.
This function is available only when the AUTO mode is selected to the
(
33)
VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT menu
. For a component video
signal, the signal type is identified automatically independently of this
function.
For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal
The vertical position, horizontal position and aspect ratio will be automatically
set to default.
For a component video signal
The horizontal phase will be automatically set to default.
● The automatic adjustment operation requires about 10 seconds. Also please
note that it may not function correctly with some input.
OFF
Adjusting the position
FREEZE
MY BUTTON
1
KEYSTONE
Press the POSITION button on the remote control.
The “POSITION” indication will appear on the screen.
2
ꢀ.
MENU
POSITION
Use the cursor buttons ▲/▼/◄/► to adjust the picture
ꢁ.
position.
When you want to reset the operation, press the RESET button on the remote
control during the operation.
To complete this operation, press the POSITION button again. Even if you don’t
do anything, the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds.
● When this function is performed at a video signal, a certain extra such as a line
may appear outside a picture.
ꢁ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Correcting the keystone distortions
MAGNIFY
HOME
END
PAGE UP
VOLUME
MUTE
Press the KEYSTONE button on the
ON
ꢀ.
ꢀ-';5610'ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ#761ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ':'%76'ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ/#07#.ꢀ
remote control. A dialog will appear on the
screen to aid you in correcting the distortion.
PAGE DOWN
OFF
ꢁꢂ
FREEZE
MY BUTTON
KEYSTONE
1
2
Use the cursor buttons ▲/▼ to select
AUTO or MANUAL operation, and press the button ► to
perform the following.
ꢁ.
ꢀ) AUTO executes automatic vertical keystone correction.
ꢁ) MANUAL displays a dialog for vertical keystone correction.
Use the buttons ▲/▼ for adjustment.
To close the dialog and complete this operation, press
the KEYSTONE button again. Even if you don’t do
anything, the dialog will automatically disappear after
a few seconds.
ꢀꢁ
-';5610'ꢂ
● The adjustable range for correction will vary among inputs. For some input, this
function may not work well.
● When V:INVERT or H&V:INVERT is selected to the MIRROR item in the
SETUP menu, if the projector screen is inclined or angled downward, the Auto
Keystone function may not work correctly.
● When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE (telephoto focus), this correction
may be excessive. This function should be used when the zoom adjustment is
set to the WIDE (wide-angle focus) whenever possible.
● When vertical degree is almost 0 degree, the automatic keystone distortion
correction may not work.
● When vertical degree is almost ±30 degree, the automatic keystone distortion
correction may not work well.
(
48).
● This function will be unavailable when Transition Detector is on
Using the magnify feature
SEARCH
AUTO
VIDEO
RGB
Press the ON button of MAGNIFY on the remote control.
ꢀ.
BLANK
ASPECT
The “MAGNIFY” indication will appear on the screen
(although the indication will disappear in several seconds with
no operation), and the projector will enter the MAGNIFY mode.
MAGNIFY
HOME
END
PAGE UP
VOLUME
MUTE
ON
PAGE DOWN
ꢁ. Use the cursor buttons ▲/▼ to adjust the zoom level.
To move the zoom area, press the POSITION button in the MAGNIFY mode,
then use the cursor buttons ▲/▼/◄/► to move the area. And to finalize the
zoom area, press the POSITION button again.
To exit the MAGNIFY mode and restore the screen to normal, press the OFF
button of MAGNIFY on the remote control.
● The projector automatically exits the MAGNIFY mode when the input signal is
changed, or when the display condition is changed.
● Although in the MAGNIFY mode, the keystone distortion condition may vary, it
will be restored when the projector exits the MAGNIFY mode.
ꢁꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Freezing the screen
MAGNIFY
HOME
END
PAGE UP
VOLUME
MUTE
Press the FREEZE button on the remote control.
ꢀ.
ON
The “FREEZE” indication will appear on the screen, and the
projector will enter the FREEZE mode.
PAGE DOWN
OFF
FREEZE
MY BUTTON
KEYSTONE
1
2
To exit the FREEZE mode and restore the screen to normal,
press the FREEZE button again.
● The projector automatically exits the FREEZE mode when the input signal
changes, or when one of the projector’s buttons or the remote control buttons
of STANDBY/ON, SEARCH, RGB, VIDEO, BLANK, AUTO, ASPECT, VOLUME,
MUTE, KEYSTONE, POSITION, MENU, MAGNIFY and MY BUTTON is
pressed.
● If the projector continues projecting a still image for a long time, the LCD panel
might possibly be printed. Do not leave the projector in the FREEZE mode for
too long.
Temporarily blanking the screen
Press the BLANK button on the remote control.
The blank screen will be displayed instead of the screen of
input signal. Please refer to the BLANK item in the SCREEN
ꢀ.
SEARCH
AUTO
VIDEO
RGB
BLANK
VOL
ASPECT
MAGNIFY
(
37).
menu
HOME
PAGE UP
ON
To exit the blank screen and return to the input signal screen, press the
BLANK button again.
● The projector automatically returns to the input signal screen when one of
the projector’s buttons or the remote control buttons is pressed or one of the
commands (except get commands) is transmitted from the control port.
ꢁꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Operating the computer screen
CAUTION ►Mistaken use of the mouse/keyboard control could damage
your equipment.
• While using this function, please connect only with a computer.
• Before connecting, read the manuals of the computer you will connect.
NOTE • It may not be possible to control notebook PC, and other computers with
built-in pointing device (e.g. track ball), using this remote control. In this case, before
connecting go into BIOS (system setup) and select external mouse, and disable the
pointing device. In addition, the mouse may not function if the computer does not have
the needed utility program. See your computer’s hardware manual for details.
• The USB control can be used with Windows 95 OSR ꢁ.ꢀ or higher. It may not be
possible to use the remote control, depending on the computer’s configurations and
mouse drivers.
• The USB control can be used only for the functions listed below. You cannot do things
like press two buttons at once (for instance, pressing two buttons at the same time to
move the mouse pointer diagonally).
• This function is not available while the lamp is warming up (the POWER indicator
flashes green), and while adjusting the volume and display, correcting for trapezoidal
distortion, zooming in on the screen, using the BLANK function, or displaying the menu
screen.
USB mouse and keyboard control
ꢀ. Connect the projector’s USB port to the computer via the mouse cable.
SEARCH
VIDEO
RGB
Available function
Remote control operation
BLANK
ASPECT
AUTO
Move pointer
Left click with mouse
Right click with mouse
Use ▲, ▼, ◄, ► buttons
Press ENTER button
Press RESET button
Press HOME button
Press END button
Press PAGE UP button
Press PAGE DOWN button
Press ESC button
MAGNIFY
HOME
END
PAGE UP
VOLUME
MUTE
ON
PAGE DOWN
OFF
FREEZE
MY BUTTON
KEYSTONE
1
2
Press keyboard’s HOME key
Press keyboard’s END key
Press keyboard’s PAGE UP key
Press keyboard’s PAGE DOWN key
Press keyboard’s ESC key
POSITION
MENU
ENTER
ESC
RESET
ꢁ3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multifunctional settings
Multifunctional settings
Using the menu function
This projector has the following menus: PICTURE, IMAGE, INPUT, SETUP, SCREEN,
OPTION, NETWORK, and EASY MENU. EASY MENU consists of functions often
used, and the other menus are classified into each purpose. Each of these menus is
operated using the same methods. The basic operations of these menus are as follows.
VIDEO
RGB
SEARCH
MENU button
ASPECT
AUTO
BLANK
POSITION
MENU
MAGNIFY
HOME
END
PAGE UP
VOLUME
MUTE
ON
PAGE DOWN
OFF
ENTER button
Cursor buttons
FREEZE
MY BUTTON
KEYSTONE
1
2
ENTER
POSITION
MENU
ESC
RESET
CB
CR
/PB
ENTER
/PR
VI
RGB
UDIO IN
A
IN
1
D
A
1
EO
U
D
I
O
I
N
S-VI
2
D
R
G
B
I
N
EO
LA
N
2
ESC
RESET
RG
B
OU
C
A
IN
CO
NT
T
R
A
UDIO
OL
OU
T
US
B
RESET button
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢃ5'.'%6
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
Press the MENU button on the remote control or one of
the cursor buttons on the projector.
ꢀ
ꢀ$4+)*60'55ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢂ
ꢀ%1064#56ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢂ
ꢁ.
ꢀ2+%674'
ꢀ+/#)'
ꢀ+0276
ꢀ)#//#
ꢀ%1.14ꢀ6'/2
&'(#7.6ꢀꢁ
/+&&.'
ꢀ%1.14ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢂ
ꢀ6+06ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢂ
ꢀ5*#420'55ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢄ
ꢀ5'672
The Advanced MENU or EASY MENU will appear.
ꢀ5%4''0
ꢀ126+10
ꢀ0'6914-
In the EASY MENU
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07 ꢀ/;ꢀ/'/14;ꢀꢀꢀꢀ5#8'ꢀꢁ
If you want to change it to the Advanced MENU, select the
"Go to Advanced Menu"
ꢀ.
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
ꢀ#52'%6ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢂꢃꢄꢀ
ꢀ
3. Use the cursor buttons ▲/▼ to select an item to operate.
':'%76'
#761ꢀ-';5610'
ꢀ
ꢅꢆ
-';5610'
014/#.
2+%674'ꢀ/1&'
$4+)*60'55
%1064#56
%1.14
ꢅꢆ
ꢅꢆ
ꢅꢆ
ꢅꢆ
ꢀꢄ
4. Use the cursor buttons◄/► to operate the item.
In the Advanced MENU
6+06
5*#420'55
9*+52'4
/+4414
4'5'6
(+.6'4ꢀ6+/'
.#0)7#)'
014/#.
014/#.
Use the cursor buttons ▲/▼ to select a menu.
ꢀ.
If you want to change it to the EASY MENU, select the
ꢀꢀꢀꢆJ
'0).+5*
EASY MENU.
ꢀ)QꢀVQꢀ#FXCPEGFꢀ/GPWꢇꢇꢇ
Then press the cursor button ► on the projector or remote
control, or the ENTER button on the remote control to select
an item. The display of the selected menu will be active.
Use the cursor buttons ▲/▼ to select an item to operate.
3.
Then press the cursor button
►
on the projector or remote control, or the ENTER button
on the remote control to progress. The operation menu of the selected item will appear.
4. Use the cursor buttons▲/▼ to operate the item.
●
When you want to reset the operation, press the RESET button on the remote control
during the operation. Note that items whose functions are performed simultaneously
with operation (ex. LANGUAGE, H PHASE, VOLUME etc.) cannot be reset.
●
In the advanced menu, when you want to return to the previous display, press the cursor
button
◄
on the projector or remote control, or the ESC button on the remote control.
Press the MENU button on the remote control again to close the menu
and complete this operation. Even if you don't do anything, the dialog will
5.
automatically disappear after about ꢁ0 seconds.
● Some functions cannot be performed when a certain input port is selected, or
when a certain input signal is displayed.
ꢀ4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EASY Menu
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
ꢀ#52'%6ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢂꢃꢄꢀ
EASY Menu
ꢀ
':'%76'
#761ꢀ-';5610'
ꢀ
ꢅꢆ
-';5610'
With the EASY MENU, items shown in the table below can
be performed.
014/#.
2+%674'ꢀ/1&'
$4+)*60'55
%1064#56
%1.14
ꢅꢆ
ꢅꢆ
ꢅꢆ
ꢅꢆ
ꢀꢄ
Select an item using the cursor buttons ▲/▼ on the
projector or remote control. Then perform it referring to the
following table.
6+06
5*#420'55
9*+52'4
/+4414
014/#.
014/#.
4'5'6
(+.6'4ꢀ6+/'
.#0)7#)'
ꢀꢀꢀꢆJ
'0).+5*
ꢀ)QꢀVQꢀ#FXCPEGFꢀ/GPWꢇꢇꢇ
Item
Description
Using the buttons ◄/► switches the mode for aspect ratio.
ASPECT
See the ASPECT item in the IMAGE menu ( 30).
AUTO
Using the button ► executes the auto keystone function.
KEYSTONE
EXECUTE
See the AUTO KEYSTONE EXECUTE item in the SETUP menu
(
35).
This function will be unavailable when Transition Detector is on ( 48)
.
.
Using the buttons ◄/► corrects the keystone distortion.
KEYSTONE
See the item KEYSTONE of section SETUP menu. ( 35)
This function will be unavailable when Transition Detector is on ( 48)
Using the buttons ◄/► switches the mode of picture type. The
modes of picture type are combinations of a mode of GAMMA and
a mode of COLOR TEMP. Choose a suitable mode according to the
projected source.
NORMAL
CINEMA
DYNAMIC
ó
ó
WHITEBOARD
BOARD(GREEN)
BOARD(BLACK)
ó
ó
NORMAL: (COLOR TEMP = MID DEFAULT) + (GAMMA = #ꢁ DEFAULT)
CINEMA: (COLOR TEMP = LOW DEFAULT) + (GAMMA = #ꢀ DEFAULT)
DYNAMIC: (COLOR TEMP = HIGH DEFAULT) + (GAMMA = #3 DEFAULT)
BOARD(BLACK): (COLOR TEMP = Hi-BRIGHT-ꢁ DEFAULT) +
(GAMMA = #4 DEFAULT)
PICTURE MODE
BOARD(GREEN): (COLOR TEMP = Hi-BRIGHT-ꢀ DEFAULT) +
(GAMMA = #4 DEFAULT)
WHITEBOARD: (COLOR TEMP = MID DEFAULT) + (GAMMA = #5
DEFAULT)
• When the combination of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP differs
from pre-assigned modes above, the display on the menu for the
PICTURE MODE is “CUSTOM”. Please refer to the GAMMA ( 27)
and COLOR TEMP ( 28) items in the PICTURE menu.
•
When this function is performed, a certain extra such as a line may appear.
Using the buttons ◄/► adjusts the brightness.
See the item BRIGHTNESS in the PICTURE menu ( 27).
BRIGHTNESS
ꢀ5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EASY Menu
EASY Menu (continued)
Item
Description
Using the buttons ◄/► adjusts the contrast.
See the CONTRAST item in the PICTURE menu
CONTRAST
COLOR
TINT
(
27).
Using the buttons ◄/► adjusts the strength of whole color.
See the COLOR item in the PICTURE menu ( 28).
Using the buttons ◄/► adjusts the tint.
See the TINT item in the PICTURE menu ( 28).
Using the buttons ◄/► adjusts the sharpness.
See the SHARPNESS item in the PICTURE menu
• There may be some noise when an adjustment is made. This is
not a malfunction.
(
28).
SHARPNESS
WHISPER
Using the buttons ◄/► turns off/on the whisper mode.
See the WHISPER item in the SETUP menu ( 35).
Using the buttons ◄/► switches the mode for mirror status.
See the MIRROR item in the SETUP menu ( 36).
MIRROR
RESET
If Transition Detector is TURN ON and MIRROR status is changed,
Transition Detector Alarm ( 48) will be displayed when projector is
restarted after the power switch is turned off.
Performing this item resets all of the items of EASY MENU except
FILTER TIME and LANGUAGE.
A dialog is displayed for confirmation. Selecting RESET using the
button ▲ performs resetting.
Performing this item resets the filter timer which counts usage time
of the air filter.
A dialog is displayed for confirmation. Selecting RESET using the
button ▲ performs resetting.
FILTER TIME
LANGUAGE
See the FILTER TIME item in the OPTION menu ( 41).
Using the buttons ◄/► selects the LANGUAGE item to toggle
the menu language. Refer to description of LANGUAGE in the
SCREEN menu ( 37).
Select “Go to Advanced Menu” and press the button
ENTER button to use the menu of PICTURE, IMAGE, INPUT,
SETUP, SCREEN, OPTION or NETWORK.
►
or the
Go to
Advanced Menu
ꢀ6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE Menu
PICTURE Menu
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢃ5'.'%6
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
With the PICTURE menu, the items shown in the table
below can be performed.
ꢀ
ꢀ$4+)*60'55ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢂ
ꢀ%1064#56ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢂ
ꢀ2+%674'
ꢀ+/#)'
ꢀ+0276
ꢀ)#//#
ꢀ%1.14ꢀ6'/2
&'(#7.6ꢀꢁ
/+&&.'
ꢀ%1.14ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢂ
ꢀ6+06ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢂ
ꢀ5*#420'55ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢄ
ꢀ5'672
Select an item using the cursor buttons ▲/▼ on the
projector or remote control, and press the cursor button ►
on the projector or remote control, or the ENTER button
on the remote control to execute the item. Then perform it
referring to the following table.
ꢀ5%4''0
ꢀ126+10
ꢀ0'6914-
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07 ꢀ/;ꢀ/'/14;ꢀꢀꢀꢀ5#8'ꢀꢁ
Item
Description
BRIGHTNESS
CONTRAST
Using the buttons ▲/▼ adjusts the brightness. : Light
Using the buttons ▲/▼ adjusts the contrast. : Strong
Using the buttons ▲/▼ switches the GAMMA mode.
Dark
ó
Weak
ó
#ꢁ DEFAULT #ꢁ CUSTOM
#ꢀ DEFAULT
#ꢀ CUSTOM
#3 DEFAULT
#3 CUSTOM
ó
ó
ó
ó
#5 CUSTOM
#5 DEFAULT
#4 CUSTOM
#4 DEFAULT
ó
ó
ó
ó
To adjust CUSTOM
Selecting a mode of CUSTOM and then
pressing the button ► or the ENTER button
displays a dialog to aid you in adjusting the
mode.
ENTER :
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
This function is useful when you want to
change the brightness of particular tones.
+0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0
Choose an item using the buttons ◄/►, and
adjust the level using the buttons ▲/▼.
[
]
GAMMA CUSTOM 1
GAMMA
You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your
adjustment by pressing the ENTER button.
Each time you press the ENTER button, the pattern changes as
below.
No pattern Gray scale of 9 steps
ð
Ramp Gray scale of ꢁ5 steps
The eight equalizing bars correspond to eight tone levels of the test
pattern except the darkest in the left end. If you want to adjust the
ꢀnd tone from left end on the test pattern (Gray scale of 9 steps),
use the equalizing adjustment bar “ꢁ”. The darkest tone at the left
end of the test pattern cannot be controlled with any of equalizing
adjustment bar.
• When this function is performed, a certain extra such as a line
may appear.
ꢀ7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE Menu
PICTURE Menu (continued)
Item
Description
Using the buttons ▲/▼ switches the mode of color temperature.
HIGH DEFAULT � HIGH CUSTOM � MID DEFAULT � MID CUSTOM
LOW DEFAULT
�
LOW CUSTOM
�
Hi-BRIGHT-1 DEFAULT
�
Hi-BRIGHT-1 CUSTOM
Hi-BRIGHT-2 DEFAULT � Hi-BRIGHT-2 CUSTOM
To adjust CUSTOM
Selecting the CUSTOM and then pressing the
ENTER
:
button ► or the ENTER button displays a dialog
to aid you in adjusting the OFFSET and/or GAIN
of the CUSTOM mode.
OFFSET
GAIN
G
R
G
B
R
B
OFFSET adjustments change the color intensity
on the whole tones of the test pattern.
+0 +0 +0
+0 +0 +0
COLOR TEMP [CUSTOM-1]
COLOR TEMP
GAIN adjustments mainly affect color intensity
on the brighter tones of the test pattern.
Choose an item using the buttons ◄/►, and adjust the level using
the buttons ▲/▼.
You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your
adjustment by pressing the ENTER button.
Each time you press the ENTER button, the pattern changes as
below.
No pattern Gray scale of 9 steps
ð
Ramp Gray scale of ꢁ5 steps
• When this function is performed, a certain extra such as a line
may appear.
Using the buttons ▲/▼ adjusts the strength of whole color.
Strong
Weak
ó
COLOR
TINT
• This item can be selected only for a video signal, s-video or
component video signal.
Using the buttons ▲/▼ adjusts the tint.
Greenish
Redish
ó
• This item can be selected only for a video signal, s-video or
component video signal.
Using the buttons ▲/▼ adjusts the sharpness.
Strong
Weak
ó
SHARPNESS
• There may be some noise and/or the screen may flicker for a
moment when an adjustment is made. This is not a malfunction.
ꢀ8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE Menu
PICTURE Menu (continued)
Item
Description
Selecting a mode of MY MEMORY using the buttons ▲/▼ and then
pressing the button ► or the ENTER button performs each function.
LOADꢁ
LOADꢀ
LOAD3
LOAD4
ó
ó
ó
SAVE4 SAVE3
SAVEꢀ
SAVEꢁ
ó
ó
ó
This projector has 4 numbered memories for adjustment data.
Performing the LOADꢁ, LOADꢀ, LOAD3 or LOAD4 loads the data on
the memory whose number corresponds to the command’s number,
and adjusts the picture automatically depending on the data.
Performing the SAVEꢁ, SAVEꢀ, SAVE3 or SAVE4 saves the current
adjustment data on the memory whose number corresponds to the
command’s number.
• The current adjustment data of the items in the PICTURE menu is
stored.
• There may be some noise and/or the screen may flicker for a
MY MEMORY
moment when data is loaded to memory. This is not a malfunction.
When the current settings are not saved to memory the following
dialog is displayed.
6GORQTCT[ꢀEQPFKVKQP
ꢀ/'/14;ꢀꢁꢀ4GECNNꢀUCXGFꢀRCTCOGVGTU
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀ3WKV
To load saved adjustment settings press the MY BUTTON button.
When there are no saved adjustment settings the following dialog is
displayed.
0QꢀUCXGFꢀFCVC
~Note~
You have to assign the MY MEMORY function to the MY BUTTON
(
41).
ꢀ9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMAGE Menu
IMAGE Menu
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢂ5'.'%6
ꢀ
ꢀ#52'%6ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢂꢄ
ꢀ18'4ꢀ5%#0ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ
ꢀ8ꢀ215+6+10ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢇꢅ
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
With the IMAGE menu, items shown in the table below can
be performed.
ꢀ2+%674'
ꢀ+/#)'
ꢀ+0276
ꢀ5'672
ꢀ*ꢀ215+6+10ꢀꢀꢀꢀ ꢁꢃꢇ
ꢀꢀ
Select an item using the cursor buttons ▲/▼ on the
projector or remote control, and press the cursor button ►
on the projector or remote control, or the ENTER button
on the remote control to execute the item. Then perform it
referring to the following table.
ꢀ5%4''0
ꢀ126+10
ꢀ0'6914-
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07
ꢀ*ꢀ2*#5'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢆ
ꢀ*ꢀ5+<'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢄꢃꢃ
ꢀ#761ꢀ#&,756ꢀ':'%76'
Item
Description
Using the buttons ▲/▼ switches the mode for aspect ratio.
For an RGB signal
NORMAL
4:3 SMALL
ó ó ó
ꢁ6:9
For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal
4:3 ꢁ6:9 ꢁ4:9 SMALL
ASPECT
ó ó ó
For a no signal
4:3 (fixed)
• The NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio of the signal.
Using the buttons ▲/▼ adjusts the over-scan ratio.
Large (It reduces picture)
This item can be selected only for a video, s-video and component signal.
• When this adjustment is too large, certain degradation may appear
at the frame area of the picture. In such a case, please adjust small.
Small (It magnifies picture)
ó
OVER SCAN
V POSITION
•
Using the buttons ▲/▼ adjusts the vertical position.
Up
Down
ó
• Over-adjusting the vertical position may cause noise to appear
on the screen. If this occurs please reset the vertical position to the
default setting. Pressing the RESET button when V POSITION is
selected will reset the V POSITION to the default setting.
For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal
The adjustable range of V.POSITION depends on the OVERSCAN setting.
It is not possible to adjust when the OVERSCAN is set to ꢁ0.
Using the buttons ▲/▼ adjusts the horizontal position.
Left
Right
ó
• Over-adjusting the horizontal position may cause noise to appear
on the screen. If this occurs please reset the horizontal position to
the default setting. Pressing the RESET button when H POSITION
is selected will reset the H POSITION to the default setting.
For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal
The adjustable range of H.POSITION depends on the OVERSCAN setting
It is not possible to adjust when the OVERSCAN is set to ꢁ0.
H POSITION
H PHASE
.
Using the buttons ▲/▼ adjusts the horizontal phase to eliminate flicker.
Right Left
ó
• This item can be selected only for an RGB signal or a component
video signal.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMAGE Menu
IMAGE Menu (continued)
Item
Description
Using the buttons ▲/▼ adjusts the horizontal size.
Large Small
ó
• This item can be selected only for an RGB signal.
H SIZE
• When this adjustment is excessive, the picture may not be
displayed correctly. In such a case, please reset the adjustment
by pressing the RESET button on the remote control during this
operation.
Selecting this item performs the automatic adjustment feature.
For an RGB signal
The vertical position, the horizontal position, the horizontal phase
and the horizontal size will be automatically set to default. And the
aspect ratio will be automatically selected.
Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size
prior to attempting to use this feature. A dark picture may still be
incorrectly adjusted. Use a bright picture when adjusting.
For a video signal or s-video signal
The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be
selected automatically.
This function is available only when the AUTO mode is selected to
the VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT menu. For a component
video signal, the signal type is identified automatically independently
of this function.
AUTO ADJUST
EXECUTE
For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal
The vertical position, horizontal position and aspect ratio will be
automatically set to default.
For a component video signal
The horizontal phase will be automatically set to default.
• The automatic adjustment operation requires about ꢁ0 seconds.
Also please note that it may not function correctly with some input.
3ꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INPUT Menu
INPUT Menu
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢂ5'.'%6
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
With the INPUT menu, the items shown in the table below
can be performed.
ꢀ
ꢀ241)4'55+8'ꢀꢀꢀ68
ꢀ8+&'1ꢀ04ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ/+&
ꢀ%1.14ꢀ52#%'ꢀꢀꢀ#761
ꢀ%1/210'06ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ%1/210'06
ꢀ8+&'1ꢀ(14/#6ꢀꢀ#761
ꢀ(4#/'ꢀ.1%-ꢀꢀꢀꢀ6740ꢀ10
ꢀ4)$ꢀ+0
ꢀ2+%674'
ꢀ+/#)'
ꢀ+0276
ꢀ5'672
Select an item using the cursor buttons ▲/▼ on the
projector or remote control, and press the cursor button ►
on the projector or remote control, or the ENTER button
on the remote control to execute the item. Then perform it
referring to the following table.
ꢀ5%4''0
ꢀ126+10
ꢀ0'6914-
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07
ꢀ4'51.76+10
Item
Description
Using the buttons ▲/▼ switches the progress mode.
TV FILM TURN OFF
ó ó
• This function is performed only for an interlaced signal of a VIDEO
input, an S-VIDEO input or COMPONENT VIDEO input of 5ꢀ5i (480i)
or 6ꢀ5i (576i) signal.
PROGRESSIVE
• When TV or FILM is selected, the screen image will be sharp.
FILM adapts to the ꢀ-3 Pull-Down conversion system. But these
may cause a certain defect (for example, jagged line) of the picture
for a quick moving object. In such a case, please select TURN OFF,
even though the screen image may lose the sharpness.
Using the buttons ▲/▼ switches the noise reduction mode.
HIGH
MID LOW
ó ó
• This function performs only at a VIDEO input, an S-VIDEO or
COMPONENT VIDEO input of 5ꢀ5i(480i) or 6ꢀ5i(576i) signal.
VIDEO NR
• When this function is excessive, it may cause a certain
degradation of the picture.
Using the buttons ▲/▼ switches the mode for color space.
AUTO
RGB
ó ó
SMPTEꢀ40
REC709
REC60ꢁ
ó
ó
• This item can be selected only for an RGB signal or a component
video signal (except signals of SCART RGB from the component
video port).
COLOR SPACE
• The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode.
• The AUTO operation may not work well at some signals. In such a
case, it might be good to select a suitable mode except AUTO.
3ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INPUT Menu
INPUT Menu (continued)
Item
Description
Using the buttons ▲/▼ switches the function of COMPONENT
VIDEO port.
COMPONENT
SCART RGB
ó
When the SCART RGB is selected, the COMPONENT VIDEO port
function as a port for a SCART RGB signal input and VIDEO port
function as a port for SCART RGB sync input. A SCART adapter
and SCART cable realize a SCART RGB input to the projector. For
details, contact your dealer.
COMPONENT
Set the video format for the s-video port and video port.
(ꢁ) Use the ◄/► buttons to select the input port.
8+&'1ꢀ(14/#6
5ꢁ8+&'1 8+&'1
(2) Using the buttons ▲/▼ switches the mode
for video format.
#761
065%
2#.
AUTO
NTSC
PAL SECAM
ó ó
ó
5'%#/
065%ꢂꢃꢂꢄ
/ꢁ2#.
N-PAL
M-PAL NTSC4.43
ó
ó
VIDEO FORMAT
0ꢁ2#.
• This item is performed only for a video signal
from the VIDEO port or the S-VIDEO port.
• The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode.
• The AUTO operation may not work well for some signals. If the
picture becomes unstable (ex. an irregular picture, a color lack),
please select the mode depending on the input signal.
Using the buttons ▲/▼ turns the frame lock function on/off.
TURN ON
TURN OFF
ó
• This item performs only at a RGB signal with vertical frequency of
50 to 60 Hz.
• When the TURN ON is selected, a moving picture is displayed
more smoothly.
FRAME LOCK
• This function may cause a certain degradation of the picture. In
such a case, please select the TURN OFF.
Set the RGB input signal type for the RGB port.
(ꢁ) Use the ◄/► buttons to select the RGB
4)$ꢀ+0
port to be set.
4)$ꢁ
4)$ꢂ
5;0%ꢀ10ꢀ)ꢀ10
5;0%ꢀ10ꢀ)ꢀ1((
RGBꢁ
RGBꢀ
ó
(2) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the RGB
input signal type.
RGB IN
SYNC ON G ON
SYNC ON G OFF
ó
• Selecting TURN ON turns on the SYNC ON G mode. The SYNC
ON G mode allows reception of SYNC ON G.
• In the SYNC ON G mode, the picture may be distorted with certain
input signals. In such a case, remove the signal connector so that
no signal is received and turn SYNC ON G off, and then reconnect
the signal.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INPUT Menu
INPUT Menu (continued)
Item
Description
The resolution for the RGBꢁ and RGBꢀ input signals can be set on
this projector.
(1) In the INPUT menu select RESOLUTION using the ▲/▼ buttons and
press the ► button.
ꢀꢀꢀ4'51.76+10
The RESOLUTION menu will be displayed.
#761
ꢁꢂꢃꢄZꢀꢅꢆꢇ
ꢁꢃꢇꢂZꢀꢅꢆꢇ
ꢁꢈꢆꢂZꢀꢅꢆꢇ
(ꢀ) In the RESOLUTION menu select the
resolution you wish to display using the ▲/▼
buttons.
56#0&
Selecting AUTO will set a resolution
%7561/
ꢁꢄꢄꢂZꢀꢅꢆꢇ
appropriate to the input signal.
RESOLUTION MENU
(3) Pressing the ► or Enter button when
selecting a STANDARD resolution will
automatically adjust the horizontal and
vertical positions, clock phase and horizontal
size and automatically select an aspect ratio.
INFORMATION
RGBꢁ
ꢁꢀ80x 768@ 60
The INFORMATION dialog ( 43) will be
displayed.
%7561/ꢀ4'51.76+10
ꢁ*14<ꢂꢀZꢀꢁ8'46ꢂ
(4) To set a custom resolution use the ▲/▼
buttons to select CUSTOM and the CUSTOM
RESOLUTION BOX will be displayed. Set
the horizontal (HORZ) and vertical (VERT)
resolutions using the ▲/▼/◄/►
RESOLUTION
*2
ꢃꢄꢄꢅꢀZꢀꢃꢆꢇꢇ
37+6
5'6
CUSTOM RESOLUTION
BOX
buttons. *ꢁ
(5) To save the setting place the cursor on the
right-most digit and press the ► button.
The horizontal and vertical positions,
clock phase and horizontal size will be
automatically adjusted and an aspect ratio will
be automatically selected.
INFORMATION
RGBꢁ
99ꢀx 744@ 60
ꢀꢀꢀ4'51.76+10
#761
After the INFORMATION( 43) dialog has
ꢁꢂꢃꢄZꢀꢅꢆꢇ
ꢁꢃꢇꢂZꢀꢅꢆꢇ
ꢁꢈꢆꢂZꢀꢅꢆꢇ
56#0&
displayed for about ꢁ0 seconds the screen will
return to the RESOLUTION menu displaying
the changed resolution.
%7561/
ꢀꢉꢉꢃZꢀꢅꢄꢄ
(6) To revert back to the previous resolution
without saving changes place the cursor on
the left-most digit and press the ◄ button.
The screen will then return to the RESOLUTION menu displaying the
previous resolution.
*ꢁ Not all resolutions are guaranteed.
*ꢀ For some pictures, this function may not work well.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP Menu
SETUP Menu
ꢀꢀꢀ
ꢂ5'.'%6
ꢀ
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
With the SETUP menu, the items shown in the table below
can be performed.
Select an item using the cursor buttons ▲/▼ on the
projector or remote control, and press the cursor button ►
on the projector or remote control, or the ENTER button
on the remote control to execute the item. Then perform it
referring to the following table.
ꢀ2+%674'
ꢀ+/#)'
ꢀ+0276
ꢀ#761ꢀ-';5610'ꢀꢀꢀ':'%76'
ꢀ-';5610'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢄ
ꢀ9*+52'4ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ014/#.
ꢀ/+4414ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ014/#.
ꢀ81.7/'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢅ
ꢀ#7&+1
ꢀ5'672
ꢀ5%4''0
ꢀ126+10
ꢀ0'6914-
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07
Item
Description
Selecting this item performs the Automatic keystone distortion
correction. Projector automatically corrects vertical keystone
distortion due to the (forward/backward) setup angle by itself.
• This function will be executed only once when selected in the
Menu. When the slant of the projector is changed, executes this
function again.
• When V:INVERT or H&V:INVERT is selected to the MIRROR item
in the SETUP menu, if the projector screen is inclined or angled
downward, this function may not work correctly.
AUTO
KEYSTONE
EXECUTE
• When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE (telephoto focus),
this correction may be excessive. This function should be used
when the zoom adjustment is set to the WIDE (wide-angle focus)
whenever possible.
• When vertical degree is almost 0 degree, the automatic keystone
distortion correction may not work.
• When vertical degree is over ±30 degree, the automatic keystone
distortion correction may not work well.
•
This function will be unavailable when Transition Detector is on ( 48).
Using the buttons ▲/▼ corrects the keystone distortion.
Upper in the data Lower in the data
ó
KEYSTONE
WHISPER
• The adjustable range of this function will vary with the type of input
signal. At some signals, this function may not work well.
•
This function will be unavailable when Transition Detector is on ( 48).
Using the buttons ▲/▼ turns off/on the whisper mode.
NORMAL WHISPER
ó
• When the WHISPER is selected, acoustic noise and screen
brightness are reduced.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP Menu
SETUP Menu (continued)
Item
Description
Using the buttons ▲/▼ switches the mode for mirror status.
NORMAL
H:INVERT
V:INVERT
H&V:INVERT
ó
ó
ó
MIRROR
If Transition Detector is TURN ON and MIRROR status is changed,
Transition Detector Alarm ( 48) will be displayed when projector is
restarted after the power switch is turned off.
Using the buttons ▲/▼ adjusts the volume.
VOLUME
AUDIO
High
Low
ó
ꢀ#7&+1ꢀ
ꢀ
Allocates the audio ports.
ꢀꢀꢀ37+6ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢂꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢀꢄ
ꢀꢀ
ꢀ4)$ꢂꢀ
Choose a picture input port using the buttons
▲/▼ (1), then select the audio port to be
interlocked with the input port using the
buttons ◄/► (2). When off is selected, all
audio ports do not work for the input port.
ꢀ
4)$ꢁꢀ
ꢀ%1/210'06ꢀ
ꢀ
5ꢃ8+&'1ꢀ
ꢀ8+&'1ꢀ
ꢀ
(ꢁ) RGBꢁ
RGBꢀ
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO VIDEO
ó
ó
ó
ó
(ꢀ) ꢁ
ꢀ
3
ó ó ó
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCREEN Menu
SCREEN Menu
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢂ5'.'%6
ꢀ
ꢀ.#0)7#)'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ'0).+5*
ꢀ/'07ꢀ215+6+10
ꢀ$.#0-ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ$.#%-
ꢀ
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
With the SCREEN menu, the items shown in the table
below can be performed.
ꢀ2+%674'
ꢀ+/#)'
ꢀ+0276
ꢀ56#46ꢀ72ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ14+)+0#.
ꢀ/[5ETGGP
ꢀ/[5ETGGPꢀ.QEMꢀ6740ꢀ1((
ꢀ/'55#)'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ6740ꢀ10
ꢀ5'672
Select an item using the cursor buttons ▲/▼ on the
projector or remote control, and press the cursor button ►
on the projector or remote control, or the ENTER button
on the remote control to execute the item. Then perform it
referring to the following table.
ꢀ5%4''0
ꢀ126+10
ꢀ0'6914-
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07 ꢀ5174%'ꢀ0#/'
Item
Description
Using the buttons ▲/▼ switches the OSD (On Screen Display)
language.
ENGLISH óFRANÇAIS óDEUTSCH óESPAÑOL óITALIANO
NORSK óNEDERLANDS óPORTUGUÊS ó日本語
LANGUAGE
ó
ó óSVENSKA ó
SUOMI óPOLSKI óTÜRKÇE
Using the buttons ◄/►/▲/▼ adjusts the menu position.
MENU POSITION To quit the operation, press the MENU button on the remote control
or keep no operation for about ꢁ0 seconds.
Using the buttons ▲/▼ switches the mode for the blank screen.
The blank screen is a screen for the temporarily blanking feature
(
22). It is displayed by pressing the BLANK button on the remote
control.
MyScreen
ORIGINAL
BLUE
WHITE
BLACK
ó
ó
ó
ó
BLANK
MyScreen is a screen you can register as a desired screen. The
ORIGINAL screen is the existing standard screen. BLUE, WHITE
and BLACK are non-patterned (plain) screens in each color.
• To avoid remaining as an afterimage, the MyScreen and the
ORIGINAL screens will change to the BLACK screen after several
minutes.
• For the MyScreen, please refer to the MyScreen item ( 38).
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCREEN Menu
SCREEN Menu (continued)
Item
Description
Using the buttons ▲/▼ switches the mode for the start-up screen.
The start-up screen is a screen displayed when no signal or an
unsuitable signal is detected.
MyScreen
ORIGINAL
TURN OFF
ó
ó
MyScreen is a screen you can register as a desired screen.The
ORIGINAL screen is the existing standard screen. When TURN
OFF is selected, the BLACK screen is used.
• To avoid remaining as an afterimage, the MyScreen and the
ORIGINAL screens will change to the BLANK screen after several
minutes. If also the BLANK screen is the MyScreen or ORIGINAL, it
will change to the BLACK screen.
START UP
• For the MyScreen, please refer to the item MyScreen
. For
below
the BLANK screen, please refer to the BLANK item ( 37).
• This function will be unavailable and fixed to Myscreen when
MyScreen Password in the Security Menu is on.
This item functions for capturing the MyScreen of the blank screen
and the start-up screen. Please execute displaying the input
including the picture you want to capture.
ꢁ. Selecting this item displays a dialog titled “MyScreen”. It will ask
you if you start capturing the picture from the current screen.
Please wait for the target picture to be displayed, and press the
ENTER button on the remote control when the picture is displayed.
The picture will freeze and the frame for capturing appears.
To stop performing, press the RESET or ESC button on the
remote control.
ꢀ. Using the buttons ◄/►/▲/▼ adjusts the frame position. Please
move the frame to the position of the picture which you want to use.
The frame may not be able to be moved for some input signals.
To start registration, press the ENTER button on the remote control.
To restore the screen and return to the previous dialog, press the
RESET or ESC button on the remote control.
MyScreen
Registration takes several minutes. When the registration is
completed, the registered screen and the message “MyScreen
registration is finished.” are displayed for several seconds. If the
registration failed, the message “A capturing error has occurred.
Please try again.” is displayed.
• This function will be unavailable when MyScreen Password in the
Security Menu is on.
NOTE : The KEYSTONE cannot be adjusted while using the
MyScreen function.
Using the buttons ▲/▼ turns on/off the MyScreen lock function.
TURN ON
TURN OFF
ó
When the TURN ON is selected, the item MyScreen is locked. Use
this function for protecting the current MyScreen.
• This function will be unavailable when MyScreen Password in the
Security Menu is on.
MyScreen Lock
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCREEN Menu
SCREEN Menu (continued)
Item
Description
Using the buttons ▲/▼ turns on/off the message function.
TURN ON TURN OFF
ó
When the TURN ON is selected, the following message function works.
“AUTO IN PROGRESS” while automatically adjusting
”NO INPUT IS DETECTED”
”SYNC IS OUT OF RANGE”
"Searching….” while searching for the input
”Detecting….” while an input signal is detected
The indication of the input signal displayed by changing
The indication of the aspect ratio displayed by changing
The indication of the My Memory displayed by changing
The indication of the Picture Mode displayed by changing
The indication of "FREEZE" and "II" while freezing the screen by
pressing the FREEZE button.
MESSAGE
• When the TURN OFF is selected, please remember if the picture
is freezing. Do not mistake freezing for a malfunction ( 22).
Each input port for this projector can have a name applied to it.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SCREEN
5174%'ꢀ0#/'
menu to select SOURCE NAME and press
the ► button. The SOURCE NAME menu
will be displayed.
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ4)$ꢁꢀꢂꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ4)$ꢃꢀꢂꢀ&'5-612ꢀ2%
%1/210'06ꢀꢂꢀ&8&
ꢀꢀ5ꢄ8+&'1ꢀꢂꢀ%#/'4#
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ8+&'1ꢀꢂꢀ864
(2) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SOURCE
NAME menu to select the port to be named
and press the ► button. The SOURCE
NAME dialog will be displayed.
SOURCE NAME MENU
*Right side of the menu is blank
until a name is specified
ꢁ5'.'%6ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ0#/'ꢁꢀ4)$ꢂ
ꢀ4ꢀ)ꢀ$ꢀꢂ
(3) The current name will be displayed
on the first line. Use the ◄/►/▲/▼ and
ENTER or INPUT buttons to select and
enter characters. The RESET button can
be used to erase ꢁ character at a time. The
#ꢀ$ꢀ%ꢀ&ꢀ'ꢀ(ꢀ)ꢀ*ꢀ+ꢀ,ꢀ-ꢀ.ꢀ/ꢀ0
ꢀ
1ꢀ2ꢀ3ꢀ4ꢀ5ꢀ6ꢀ7ꢀ8ꢀ9ꢀ:ꢀ;ꢀ<
CꢀDꢀEꢀFꢀGꢀHꢀIꢀJꢀKꢀLꢀMꢀNꢀOꢀP
QꢀRꢀSꢀTꢀUꢀVꢀWꢀXꢀYꢀZꢀ[ꢀ\
ꢃꢀꢂꢀꢄꢀꢅꢀꢆꢀꢇꢀꢈꢀꢉꢀꢊꢀꢋ
ꢀꢀꢌꢀAꢀꢍꢀꢎꢀꢏꢀ!ꢀꢐ
SOURCE NAME name can be a maximum of ꢁ6 characters.
'5%ꢀꢑꢀꢀꢀꢒꢀꢀꢀꢁ37+6
'06'4ꢀꢑꢁ0':6
(4) To change an already inserted character,
press the ▲ button while the cursor is on the
[A-N] row to move the cursor to the name
displayed on the first line and use the ◄/►
buttons to select character to be changed.
Once a character in the name is selected
use the ▼ button to move the cursor back
down to the character entry area to select
and enter characters as described above.
ꢁ5'.'%6ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ0#/'ꢁꢀ4)$ꢂ
ꢀ4ꢀ)ꢀ$ꢀꢂ
#ꢀ$ꢀ%ꢀ&ꢀ'ꢀ(ꢀ)ꢀ*ꢀ+ꢀ,ꢀ-ꢀ.ꢀ/ꢀ0
ꢀ
1ꢀ2ꢀ3ꢀ4ꢀ5ꢀ6ꢀ7ꢀ8ꢀ9ꢀ:ꢀ;ꢀ<
CꢀDꢀEꢀFꢀGꢀHꢀIꢀJꢀKꢀLꢀMꢀNꢀOꢀP
QꢀRꢀSꢀTꢀUꢀVꢀWꢀXꢀYꢀZꢀ[ꢀ\
ꢃꢀꢂꢀꢄꢀꢅꢀꢆꢀꢇꢀꢈꢀꢉꢀꢊꢀꢋ
ꢀꢀꢌꢀAꢀꢍꢀꢎꢀꢏꢀ!ꢀꢐ
'5%ꢀꢑꢀꢀꢀꢒꢀꢀꢀꢁ37+6
ꢁ5'.'%6ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ0#/'ꢁꢀ4)$ꢂ
ꢀ4ꢀ)ꢀ$ꢀꢂ
#ꢀ$ꢀ%ꢀ&ꢀ'ꢀ(ꢀ)ꢀ*ꢀ+ꢀ,ꢀ-ꢀ.ꢀ/ꢀ0
ꢀ
(5) Select and press the ENTER or
INPUT buttons when finished entering text.
To revert to the previous name without
saving changes press the ESC or ◄ button
and the INPUT button simultaneously.
1ꢀ2ꢀ3ꢀ4ꢀ5ꢀ6ꢀ7ꢀ8ꢀ9ꢀ:ꢀ;ꢀ<
CꢀDꢀEꢀFꢀGꢀHꢀIꢀJꢀKꢀLꢀMꢀNꢀOꢀP
QꢀRꢀSꢀTꢀUꢀVꢀWꢀXꢀYꢀZꢀ[ꢀ\
ꢃꢀꢂꢀꢄꢀꢅꢀꢆꢀꢇꢀꢈꢀꢉꢀꢊꢀꢋ
ꢀꢀꢌꢀAꢀꢍꢀꢎꢀꢏꢀ!ꢀꢐ
'5%ꢀꢑꢀꢀꢀꢒꢀꢀꢀꢁ37+6
'06'4ꢀꢑꢁ0':6
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION Menu
OPTION Menu
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢂ5'.'%6
ꢀ
ꢀ#761ꢀ5'#4%*ꢀꢀꢀ6740ꢀ1((
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
With the OPTION menu, the items shown in the table below can
be performed.
Select an item using the cursor buttons ▲/▼ on the projector or
remote control, and press the cursor button ► on the projector
or remote control, or the ENTER button on the remote control to
execute the item, except for the items LAMP TIME and FILTER
TIME. Then perform it referring to the following table.
ꢀ2+%674'
ꢀ+/#)'
ꢀ+0276
ꢀ#761ꢀ-';5610'ꢀ6740ꢀ1((
ꢀ#761ꢀ10ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ6740ꢀ1((
ꢀ#761ꢀ1((ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃOKP
ꢀ.#/2ꢀ6+/'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃJ
ꢀ5'672
ꢀ5%4''0
ꢀ126+10
ꢀ0'6914-
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07ꢀ ꢀ5'48+%'
ꢀ5'%74+6;
ꢀ(+.6'4ꢀ6+/'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃJ
ꢀ/;ꢀ$76610
Item
Description
Using the buttons ▲/▼ turns on/off the automatic signal search function.
TURN ON TURN OFF
ó
When the TURN ON is selected, detecting no signal automatically cycles
through input ports in the following order. The search is started from the
current port. Then when an input is found, the projector will stop searching
and display the image.
AUTO SEARCH
RGB INꢁ RGB INꢀ COMPONENT VIDEO S-VIDEO VIDEO
ð
ð
ð
ð
Using the buttons ▲/▼ turns on/off the automatic keystone function.
TURN ON TURN OFF
ó
TURN ON : Automatic keystone distortion correction will be
executed whenever changing the slant of the projector.
TURN OFF : This function is disabled. Please execute the AUTO
KEYSTONE EXECUTE in the SETUP Menu for automatic keystone
distortion correction.
AUTO
KEYSTONE
When the projector is suspended from the ceiling this feature will
not function properly so select TURN OFF.
This function will be unavailable when Transition Detector is on ( 48)
.
Using the buttons ▲/▼ turns on/off the AUTO ON function.
TURN ON
TURN OFF
ó
When set to TURN ON, the lamp will only be automatically turned on when
the Power switch is turned on after the power was turned off by Power
switch last time.
The lamp will not be automatically turned on when the Power switch is
turned on if the lamp was turned off with the following procedures.
• The lamp was turned off with a remote control, projector button, or
power turn off command.
• The lamp was turned off with an AUTO OFF function ( 41).
AUTO ON
• The lamp was turned on by an AUTO ON function and was turned
off about 30 minutes after no signal had been detected.
When no input is detected after the power on and AUTO OFF time is set to 0,
the projector will be turned off after about 30 minutes passed.
When no input is detected after the power on and AUTO OFF time is set to
ꢁ to 99, the projector will be turned off after the passed time reaches at the
set time.
If one of the projector's buttons or the remote control buttons is pressed
or one of the commands (except get commands) is transmitted from the
control port during the corresponding time, projector will not be turned off.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION Menu
OPTION Menu (continued)
Item
Description
Using the buttons ▲/▼ adjusts the time to count down to
automatically turn the projector off.
Long (max. 99 minutes)
Short (min. 0 minute = DISABLE)
ó
AUTO OFF
AUTO OFF
ENABLE
DISABLE
ꢁ
0
When the time is set to 0, the projector is not turned off automatically.
When the time is set to ꢁ to 99, and when the passed time with no-
signal or an unsuitable signal reaches at the set time, the projector
lamp will be turned off.
AUTO OFF
If one of the projector's buttons or the remote control buttons
is pressed or one of the commands (except get commands) is
transmitted from the control port during the corresponding time,
projector will not be turned off.
Please refer to the section “Turning off the power” ( 17).
The lamp time is the time counted after the last resetting. It is
shown in the OPTION menu as the usage time of the lamp.
Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the button ►
of the projector displays a dialog. To reset the lamp time, select the
RESET using the button ▲.
LAMP TIME
RESET CANCEL
• Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp,
for a suitable indication about the lamp.
• For the lamp replacement, see the section "Lamp" ( 53, 54).
The filter time is the time counted after the last resetting. It is shown
in the OPTION menu as the usage time of the air filter.
Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the button ► of the
projector displays a dialog. To reset the filter time, select the RESET using
the button ▲.
FILTER TIME
RESET CANCEL
•
Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced
the air filter, for a suitable indication about the air filter.
• For the air filter cleaning, see the section "Air filter" ( 55, 56).
Sets the assigned function for the MY BUTTONꢁ and ꢀ buttons on
the included remote control.
• RGBꢁ: Sets port to RGBꢁ.
• RGBꢀ: Sets port to RGBꢀ.
• COMPONENT: Sets port to COMPONENT.
• S-VIDEO: Sets port to S-VIDEO.
• VIDEO: Sets port to VIDEO.
• e-SHOT: Displays the e-SHOT menu ( 51).
MY BUTTON
• INFORMATION: Displays INPUT INFORMATION ( 43).
• AUTO KEYSTONE EXECUTE: Performs automatic KEYSTONE
correction ( 35).
• MY MEMORY: Loads MY MEMORY settings ( 29).
• PICTURE MODE: Changes the PICTURE mode ( 25).
•
FILTER RESET: Displays the filter time reset confirmation dialogue
(
41).
• VOLUME+: Sets the volume up.
• VOLUME : Sets the volume down.
-
4ꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION Menu
OPTION Menu (continued)
Item
Description
Selecting this item displays the SERVICE menu.
Select an item using the buttons ▲/▼, and press the button ► or
the ENTER button on the remote control to execute the item.
FAN SPEED
AUTO ADJUST
GHOST
FILTER MESSAGE
KEY LOCK
ó
ó
ó
ó
FACTORY RESET
INFORMATION
REMOTE FREQ.
ó
ó
FAN SPEED
Using the buttons ▲/▼ switches the rotation speed of the cooling
fans. The HIGH is the mode for use at highlands etc. Note that the
projector is noisier when the HIGH is selected.
HIGH
NORMAL
ó
AUTO ADJUST
Using the buttons ▲/▼ enables/disables the automatic adjustment.
When DISABLE is selected, the automatic adjustment feature is
disabled, although rough adjustment is automatically performed
depending on the basic setting.
ENABLE
DISABLE
ó
•
Depending on conditions, such as input image, signal cable to the
projector, environment around the projector, etc., the automatic adjustment
may not work correctly. In such a case, please choose DISABLE to
disable the automatic adjustment, and make adjustment manually.
GHOST
1. Select a color element of ghost using the buttons ◄/►.
ꢀ. Adjust the selected element using the buttons ▲/▼ to disappear ghost.
SERVICE
FILTER MESSAGE
Use the ▲/▼ button to set the timer for the interval to show the
message for cleaning up the air filter.
50h
ꢁ00h TURN OFF
ꢀ00h
300h
ó ó ó ó
After selecting “50h”, “ꢁ00h”, “ꢀ00h”, or “300h”, the message
“REMINDER HRS PASSED AFTER THE LAST FILTER CHECK”
***
will appear after the timer reaches the interval time set by the menu.
(
59) When the “TURN OFF” is chosen, the air filter cleaning
message will not appear.
• Please check and clean the air filter periodically, even if there is no
message. If the air filter becomes to be blocked by dust or others,
the internal temperature will rise, which could cause malfunction, or
reduce the lifetime of the projector.
• It is recommended to choose “ꢁ00h” in general. Please be careful
with the operating environment of the projector and the condition of
the air filter, especially when the “200h”, “300h” or “TURN OFF” is
chosen.
KEY LOCK
Using the buttons ▲/▼ turns on/off the key lock feature. When
TURN ON is selected, the buttons on the projector except the
STANDBY/ON button are locked.
TURN ON
TURN OFF
ó
• Please use to avoid a mischief and touching accidentally. This
function does not have any effect on the remote control.
4ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION Menu
OPTION Menu (continued)
Item
Description
REMOTE FREQ.
Use the ▲/▼ button to change the Projector's remote sensor
setting ( 16).
ꢁ:NORMAL
ꢀ:HIGH
ó
Items with a checkmark are on. The factory default setting is for
both ꢁ:NORMAL and ꢀ:HIGH to be on. If the remote control does
not function correctly set the this to either only ꢁ or only ꢀ as
described in Remote Control Settings ( 16).
Neither can be turned off at the same time.
INFORMATION
Selecting this item displays a dialog titled “INPUT INFORMATION”.
It shows the information about the current input.
INPUT-INFORMATION
RGB
ꢁ0ꢀ4x768 @60Hz
FRAME LOCK
INPUT-INFORMATION
S-VIDEO
INPUT-INFORMATION
COMPONENT
576i @50
SECAM
AUTO
SERVICE
SCART RGB
• The “FRAME LOCK” message on the dialog means the frame lock
function is working.
• The “SCART RGB” message means the COMPONENT VIDEO
port is working as a SCART RGB input port. Please refer to the
COMPONENT item in INPUT menu. ( 33)
• This item can't be selected for no signal and sync out.
FACTORY RESET
Selecting RESET using the button ▲ performs this function. By
this function, all the items in all of menus will collectively return to
the initial setting. Note that the items LAMP TIME, FILTER TIME,
LANGUAGE and OPTION_SECURITY are not reset.
RESET CANCEL
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION Menu
OPTION Menu (continued)
Item
Description
This projector is equipped with security functions.
User registration is required before using the security functions.
Please contact your local dealer.
1. Using Security Features
1.1 Inputting the PASSWORD
1.1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the OPTION
menu to select SECURITY and press the ►
button. The ENTER PASSWORD box will be
displayed. The factory default PASSWORD is
3046. This PASSWORD can be changed (ꢀ.ꢁ
5'%74+6;
'06'4ꢀ2#55914&
Changing the PASSWORD).
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ
37+6
0':6
NOTE : It is strongly recommended the factory
default PASSWORD to be changed as
soon as possible.
ENTER PASSWORD
BOX
ꢀ5'%74+6;
5'%74+6;ꢀ2#55914&ꢀ%*#0)'
1.1-2 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the
registered PASSWORD. Move the cursor to
the right side of the ENTER PASSWORD
BOX and press the ► button to display the
SECURITY menu. If an incorrect PASSWORD
is input the ENTER PASSWORD BOX will
be displayed again. If incorrect PASSWORD
is input 3 times the projector will turn off.
Afterwards the projector will turn off every time
an incorrect PASSWORD is input.
ꢀꢀꢀ
/[5ETGGPꢀ2#55914&ꢀ6740ꢀ1((
2+0ꢀ.1%-ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ6740ꢀ1((
64#05+6+10ꢀ&'6'%614ꢀ6740ꢀ1((
ꢀ
SECURITY MENU
SECURITY
5'%74+6;
'06'4ꢀ0'9ꢀ2#55914&
1.2 Changing the PASSWORD
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ
1.2-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu
to select SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE
and press the ► button to display the ENTER
NEW PASSWORD BOX.
37+6
0':6
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
BOX
1.2-2 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the new
PASSWORD.
5'%74+6;
0'9ꢀ2#55914&ꢀ#)#+0
ꢀ.ꢁ-3 Move the cursor to the right side of the
ENTER NEW PASSWORD BOX and press
the ► button to display the NEW PASSWORD
AGAIN BOX, enter the same PASSWORD
again.
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ
%#0%'.
1-
NEW PASSWORD
AGAIN BOX
ꢀ.ꢁ-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW
PASSWORD AGAIN BOX and press the ►
button and the NOTE NEW PASSWORD BOX
will be displayed for about ꢁ0 seconds, please
make note of the PASSWORD during this time.
Pressing the ENTER button on the remote
controll or INPUT button on the projector will
close the NOTE NEW PASSWORD BOX.
5'%74+6;
016'ꢀ0'9ꢀ2#55914&
ꢂꢀꢀꢂꢀꢀꢂꢀꢀꢂ
'06'4ꢀꢃ ꢁ':+6
NOTE NEW
PASSWORD BOX
NOTE : Please do not forget your PASSWORD.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION Menu
OPTION Menu (continued)
Item
Description
1.3 If you have forgotten your PASSWORD
ꢀ.3-ꢀ Follow the procedure in ꢀ.ꢀ-ꢀ to display the
ENTER PASSWORD BOX.
ꢀ.3-ꢁ While the ENTER PASSWORD BOX is
displayed, press and hold the RESET button
on the remote control for about 3 seconds or
press and hold the INPUT and ► buttons on
the projector for about 3 seconds.
The ꢀ0 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed.
NOTE: If there is no key input for about 55 seconds
while the Inquiring Code is displayed the menu will
close. If necessary repeat the process from ꢀ.3-ꢀ.
ꢀ5'%74+6;ꢀ2#55914&
+PSWKTKPIꢀ%QFG
ꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁ
ꢀ
Inquiring Code
(PASSWORD)
ꢀ.3-3 Contact your dealer with the ꢀ0 digit Inquiring Code. Your PASSWORD
will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.
2. Using the MyScreen PASSWORD Function
The MyScreen PASSWORD function can be used to prohibit access to the
MyScreen function and prevent the currently registered MyScreen image
from being overwritten.
2.1 Turning on the MyScreen
Function
2.1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY
menu to select MyScreen PASSWORD and
press the ► button to display the MyScreen
PASSWORD on/off menu.
PASSWORD
/[5ETGGPꢀ2#55914&
SECURITY
6740ꢀ10
6740ꢀ1((
MyScreen PASSWORD
on/off menu
2.2 Setting the PASSWORD
ꢁ.ꢁ-ꢀ Display the MyScreen on/off menu using the
procedure in ꢁ.ꢀ-ꢀ.
/[5ETGGP
'06'4ꢀ2#55914&
2.2-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MyScreen
PASSWORD on/off menu to select TURN ON.
The ENTER PASSWORD BOX (small) will be
displayed.
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ
37+6
0':6
ENTER PASSWORD
BOX (small)
2.2-3 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the
PASSWORD. Move the cursor to the right
side of the ENTER PASSWORD BOX
(small) and press the ► button to display the
CHECK PASSWORD BOX, enter the same
PASSWORD again.
/[5ETGGP
%*'%-ꢀ2#55914&
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ
37+6
0':6
CHECK PASSWORD
BOX
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION Menu
OPTION Menu (continued)
Item
Description
ꢁ.ꢁ-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the CHECK
PASSWORD BOX and press the ► button to
display the PASSWORD for about ꢁ0 seconds,
please make note of the PASSWORD during
this time. After the PASSWORD has displayed
for about ꢁ0 seconds the screen will return to
the MyScreen PASSWORD on/off menu.
Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control
or INPUT button on the projector will close the
PASSWORD box.
/[5ETGGP
%1/2.'6'
ꢁꢂꢂꢁꢂꢂꢁꢂꢂꢁ
'06'4ꢂꢃ ꢀ':+6
PASSWORD BOX
When a PASSWORD is set for MyScreen:
The MyScreen registration function (and menu) will be unavailable.
The START UP setting will be locked on MyScreen (and the menu will be
unavailable).
•
•
Turning the MyScreen PASSWORD off will allow normal operation of both
functions.
NOTE : Please do not forget your MyScreen PASSWORD.
2.3 Turning the PASSWORD off
ꢁ.3-ꢀ Follow the procedure in ꢁ.ꢀ-ꢀ to display the MyScreen PASSWORD
on/off menu.
ꢁ.3-ꢁ Select TURN OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD BOX (large).
Enter the registered PASSWORD and the screen will return to the
MyScreen on/off menu.
If an incorrect PASSWORD is input the menu will close. If necessary repeat
the process from ꢁ.3-ꢀ.
SECURITY
2.4 If you have forgotten your PASSWORD
ꢁ.4-ꢀ Follow the procedure in ꢁ.ꢀ-ꢀ to display the MyScreen PASSWORD
on/off menu.
/[5ETGGP
'06'4ꢀ2#55914&
ꢁ.4-ꢁ Select TURN OFF to display the ENTER
+PSWKTKPIꢀ%QFG
ꢀꢀꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢆꢇꢈꢉꢊ
PASSWORD BOX (large). The ꢀ0 digit
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ
Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the
37+6
0':6
BOX.
ENTER PASSWORD BOX
(large)
ꢁ.4-3 Contact your dealer with the ꢀ0 digit Inquiring
Code. Your PASSWORD will be sent after
your user registration information is confirmed.
3. Using the PIN LOCK Function
PIN LOCK is a function which prevents the projector from being used unless
a registered Code is input.
3.1 Registering the PIN Code
2+0ꢀ.1%-
3.1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu
6740ꢀ10
6740ꢀ1((
to select PIN LOCK and press the ► button
or the ENTER button to display the PIN LOCK
PIN LOCK on/off
on/off menu.
menu
3.1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the PIN LOCK on/off
menu to select TURN ON and the PIN BOX
will be displayed.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION Menu
OPTION Menu (continued)
Item
Description
3.1-3 Input a 4 part PIN Code using the ▲/▼/◄/►
/RGB and INPUT buttons.
A CONFIRMATION BOX will appear. Reenter the
same PIN Code. This will complete the PIN Code
registration.
ꢀ2+0ꢀ$1:
+PRWVꢀ2+0ꢀ%QFG
ꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢀꢃꢀꢃꢀꢃ
ꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀ4)$ꢀꢂꢀ
PIN BOX
NOTE: If there is no key input for about 55 seconds
while the PIN BOX or the CONFIRMATION BOX are
displayed the menu will close. If necessary repeat
the process from 3.ꢀ-ꢀ.
ꢀ2+0ꢀ$1:
%QPHKTOCVKQP
ꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢀꢃꢀꢃꢀꢃ
Afterwards, anytime the projector is restarted after
the power switch is turned off the PIN BOX will be
displayed. Enter the registered PIN Code.
The projector can be used after entering the
registered PIN Code. If an incorrect PIN Code is
input the PIN BOX will be displayed again.
ꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀ4)$ꢀꢂꢀ
CONFIRMATION BOX
(PIN BOX)
If an incorrect PIN Code is input 3 times the projector will turn off. Afterwards
the projector will turn off every time an incorrect PIN Code is input. The
projector will also turn off if there is no key input for about 5 minutes while
the PIN BOX is displayed.
This function will activate only when the projector is started after the power
switch was turned off.
SECURITY
NOTE : Please do not forget your PIN Code.
3.2 Turning Off the PIN LOCK Function
3.ꢁ-ꢀ Follow the procedure in 3.ꢀ-ꢀ to display the PIN LOCK on/off menu.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select TURN OFF and the PIN BOX will be
displayed.
Enter the registered PIN Code to turn the PIN LOCK function off.
If an incorrect PASSWORD is entered the menu will close.
3.3 If you have forgotten your PIN Code
ꢀ2+0ꢀ$1:
3.3-ꢀ While the PIN BOX is displayed, press and
+PSWKTKPIꢀ%QFG
ꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁ
ꢀ
hold the RESET button for three seconds or
press and hold the INPUT and ► buttons for
three seconds. The ꢀ0 digit Inquiring Code will
be displayed.
Inquiring Code
(PIN Code)
NOTE: If there is no key input for about 5 minutes
while the Inquiring Code is displayed the projector
will turn off.
3.3-ꢁ Contact your dealer with the ꢀ0 digit Inquiring Code. Your PASSWORD
will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION Menu
OPTION Menu (continued)
Item
Description
4. Using the Transition Detector Function
While the Transition Detector function is ON, when power switch is started to
supply to the projector, it might react as below.
• Transition Detector alarm shown below might appear on screen, if the
projector has been moved or re-installed.
• Transition Detector alarm might appear on screen, if the MIRROR setting
has been changed.
• Keystone adjustment feature has been prohibited as long as the Transition
Detector function is ON.
4.1 Turning On the
Function
Transition Detector
4.1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to
select Transition Detector and press the ► or the
ENTER button to display the Transition Detector
on/off menu. Select TURN ON and the current
angle and mirror setting will be recorded.
6TCPUKVKQPꢀ&GVGEVQT
6740ꢀ10
6740ꢀ1((
Transition Detector
on/off menu
NOTE: This feature may not function properly if the projector
is not in a stable position when TURN ON is selected.
ꢁꢁ64#05+6+10ꢀ&'6'%614ꢀ10
4.1-2 If this function is set to TURN ON when the
vertical angle of the projector or mirror setting
at which the projector is turned on is different
than the previously recorded the Transition
Detector Alarm will be displayed and the
projector will not display the input signal.
6JGꢀRTQLGEVQTꢀJCUꢀDGGPꢀVTCPUHGTTGF
HTQOꢀRTGXKQWUN[ꢀKPUVCNNGFꢀRQUKVKQPꢂ
ꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀ2+0ꢀ$1:
ꢀ
+Hꢀ[QWꢀYKUJꢀVQꢀJCXGꢀCꢀUSWCTGꢀKOCIG
QPꢀUETGGPꢀCICKPꢃ
FKUCDNGꢀ6TCPUKVKQPꢀ&GVGEVQTꢀQPꢀ/GPWꢂ
Transition Detector Alarm
Set the Transition Detector off in the SECURITY menu or set the projector at the
recorded angle to display the input signal.
If the Transition Detector ALARM is displayed for about 5 minutes the lamp will turn off.
This function will activate only when the projector is started after the power
switch was turned off.
SECURITY
4.2 Setting the
PASSWORD
Transition Detector
4.2-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to select Transition
Detector and press the ► or the ENTER button to display the Transition
Detector on/off menu.
6TCPUKVKQPꢀ&GVGEVQT
'06'4ꢀ2#55914&
4.2-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the Transition Detector
on/off menu to select TURN ON. The ENTER
PASSWORD BOX (small) will be displayed.
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ
37+6 0':6
4.2-3 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter a PASSWORD.
Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER
PASSWORD BOX (small) and press the ► button
to display the CHECK PASSWORD BOX, enter the
same PASSWORD again.
ENTER PASSWORD
BOX (small)
6TCPUKVKQPꢀ&GVGEVQT
%*'%-ꢀ2#55914&
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ
4.2-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the CHECK
PASSWORD BOX and press the ► button to
display the PASSWORD for about 20 seconds,
please make note of the PASSWORD during
this time. After the PASSWORD has displayed
for about 20 seconds the screen will return to
the Transition Detector on/off menu.
37+6
0':6
CHECK PASSWORD
BOX
6TCPUKVKQPꢀ&GVGEVQT
%1/2.'6'
ꢂꢀꢀꢂꢀꢀꢂꢀꢀꢂ
'06'4ꢀꢃ ꢁ':+6
PASSWORD BOX
Pressing the ENTER button on the remote controll or the
INPUT button on the projector will close the PASSWORD BOX.
NOTE : Please do not forget your Transition Detector PASSWORD.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION Menu
OPTION Menu (continued)
Item
Description
4.3 Setting the Transition Detector off
4.3-ꢀ Follow the procedure in 4.ꢀ-ꢀ to display the Transition Detector on/off
menu.
4.3-ꢁ Select TURN OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD BOX (large).
Enter the registered PASSWORD and the screen will return to the
Transition Detector on/off menu.
If an incorrect PASSWORD is input the menu will close. If necessary repeat
the process from 4.3-ꢀ.
4.4 If you have forgotten your PASSWORD
4.4-ꢀ Follow the procedure in 4.ꢀ-ꢀ to display the Transition Detector on/off
menu.
SECURITY
6TCPUKVKQPꢀ&GVGEVQT
4.4-ꢁ Select TURN OFF to display the ENTER
'06'4ꢀ2#55914&
PASSWORD BOX (large). The ꢀ0 digit
Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the
BOX.
+PSWKTKPIꢀ%QFG
ꢀꢀꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢆꢇꢈꢉꢊ
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ
0':6
37+6
ENTER PASSWORD BOX
(large)
4.4-3 Contact your dealer with the ꢀ0 digit Inquiring
Code. Your PASSWORD will be sent after your
user registration information is confirmed.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NETWORK Menu
NETWORK Menu
RJ Model Only.
ꢀꢁ
5'.'%6ꢁ
ꢁ/'07ꢁ=4)$ꢃ?
Select [Network] from the main menu to access the following
functions.
ꢁ2+%674'
ꢁ+/#)'
ꢁ+0276
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
&*%2ꢁ
ꢁ6740ꢁ1((
+2ꢁ#&&4'55ꢁ
57$0'6ꢁ/#5-ꢁ
ꢁ5'672
ꢁ&'(#7.6ꢁ)#6'9#;ꢁ
ꢁ6+/'ꢁ&+(('4'0%'
ꢁ5%4''0
ꢁ126+10
ꢁ0'6914-
ꢁ'#5;ꢁ/'07ꢁ
ꢁ
'ꢁ#0&ꢁ6+/'
ꢁGꢂ5*16ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
+0(14/#6+10ꢁ
5'48+%'
NOTE • The factory default setting for DHCP is “TURN ON”. You do not have to set
up [DHCP], [IP ADDRESS], [SUBNET MASK] or [DEFAULT GATEWAY] if your network
has DHCP enabled. ( User’s Manual - Network Functions)
• If you are not utilizing SNTP ( User’s Manual - Network Functions), then you must
set the DATE AND TIME during the initial installation. Please refer to the item DATE
AND TIME on the following list.
NOTE Ask with your network administrator before connecting to an existing
access point on your network. Incorrect network settings on this projector may cause
unnecessary troubles on the network.
Item
Operation
DHCP TURN ON/TURN OFF:
DHCP
DHCP
TURN ON
TURN OFF
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to turn DHCP on/off
TURN ON TURN OFF
(Dynamic Host
Configuration
Protocol)
ó
Select TURN OFF when the network does not have DHCP
enabled.
Input the IP ADDRESS :
192. 168. 1. 254
IP ADDRESS
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the IP
ADDRESS. This function is available as
long as DHCP is set to “TURN OFF”.
IP ADDRESS
~Note~
IP ADDRESS is a number which identifies this projector on the
network. You cannot have two devices with the same IP ADDRESS
on the same network.
Input the SUBNET MASK :
Use the buttons ▲/▼/◄/► to enter the
255. 255.255. 0
SUBNET MASK
SUBNET MASK same SUBNET MASK of your PC.
This function is available as long as DHCP
is set to “TURN OFF”.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NETWORK Menu
NETWORK Menu (continued)
8776-RJ Only.
Operation
Item
Input the DEFAULT GATEWAY :
0. 0. 0.
0
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the DEFAULT
GATEWAY (a node on a computer network that serves
as an access point to another network) address.
DEFAULT
GATEWAY
DEFAULT GATEWAY
This function is available as long as DHCP is set to “TURN OFF”.
Input the TIME DIFFERENCE :
6+/'ꢀ&+(('4'0%'ꢀ
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to enter the TIME
DIFFERENCE.
Set the same TIME DIFFERENCE as that on your
PC. If unsure, ask your network administrator.
Use the ◄ button to return to the menu
after setting the TIME DIFFERENCE.
TIME
DIFFERENCE
㪞㪤㪫㩷㪇㩷 㪇㩷㪑㪇㩷 㪇㩷
Input DATE AND TIME :
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the Year (last two digits),
Month, Date, Hour and Minute.
~Note~
DATE AND TIME
The projector will override this setting and retrieve DATE AND TIME
information from the Timeserver when SNTP is enabled. See [Date/
Time Settings] in [User’s Manual - Network Functions: Configuring
and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser] for SNTP settings.
e-SHOT display :
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select an item and the ► or ENTER
buttons to display the image.
Imageꢀ
Imageꢁ
Image3
Image4
Gꢀ5*16ꢁ
+/#)'ꢁꢀꢁꢄꢁ &'/10564#6+10ꢀꢃꢄ
0'9+/#)'ꢁꢀꢁꢂꢁ 24'5'06#6+10(+.'
&'/10564#6+10ꢀꢃꢅ
6#$.'
+/#)'ꢁꢀꢁꢅꢁ
+/#)'ꢁꢀꢁꢆꢁ
File names of registered images are
displayed by ꢀ6 characters or less.
Example: DEMONSTRATION-0ꢀ
"NEW" stamp is added to the head of line when
the image is registered newly. After the image
is displayed, "NEW" stamp will be erased.
Once an image is displayed, you can use the
▲/▼ buttons to page through the images. Use
the ◄ or ESC buttons to return to the menu.
IMAGE‑1
e-SHOT
e‑SHOT
RESET : IMAGE‑1
,
+
:NO
,
ENTER
:YES
ESC
Pressing the RESET button on the remote control while an image is
being displayed will display the RESET menu. The displayed image
can be deleted from the RESET menu using the ENTER button on
the remote control or the INPUT button on the projector.
If you do not wish to delete the image use the ESC button on the remote
control or push the ◄ and INPUT buttons on the projector at the same time.
~Note~
•
•
Items with no image stored cannot be selected.
Images can be changed using the ▲/▼ buttons while the image data downloads.
5ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NETWORK Menu
NETWORK Menu (continued)
RJ Model Only.
Operation
Item
INFORMATION display :
Use the ► or ENTER buttons to view
network information and confirm settings.
0'6914-ꢀꢊꢀ+0(14/#6+10ꢀ
0#/'ꢀ
+2ꢀ#&&4'55ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢂꢃꢄꢀꢀꢁꢅꢆꢄꢀꢀꢁꢀꢄꢀꢃꢇꢈꢀ
57$0'6/#5-ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢀꢇꢇꢄꢀꢀꢃꢇꢇꢄꢀꢀꢃꢇꢇꢀꢄꢉꢀꢀ
&'(#7.6ꢀ)#6'9#;ꢀꢀꢀꢉꢀꢄꢀꢉꢄꢀꢀꢉꢀꢄꢀꢉꢀ
/#%ꢀ#&&4'55ꢀ ꢉꢉꢀꢌꢉꢀꢉꢀꢌꢀꢆꢍꢀꢌꢀꢇꢅꢀꢌꢀ#%ꢀꢌꢍꢀ%ꢀ
6+/'ꢀ&+(('4'0%'ꢀꢀ)/6ꢀꢉꢉꢌꢉꢉ
'ꢀ#0&ꢀ6+/'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢉꢀꢀꢉꢀꢉꢀꢋꢀꢁꢋꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢆꢌꢁꢇ
INFORMATION
~Note~
• Only the first 16 characters of the projector name are displayed.
• When the voltage level of battery for built in clock decreases, set
time may become incorrect even though accurate date and time are
input.
Replace a battery through the following the instructions. ( 57)
Excuting this item restarts and initializes the Network Function.
Choose the RESTART using the button ►.
5'48+%'
4'56#46
Then use the button ▲ to execute.
SERVICE
4'56#46
':'%76'
%#0%'.
Network will be once cut off when choose restart.
If DHCP is selected on, IP address may be changed.
After selecting RESTART, Network menu may not be controlled
approx. 30 seconds.
Network Functions
Refer to the separate volume on Network Functions.
5ꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Maintenance
Lamp
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
HIGH TEMPERATURE
HIGH PRESSURE
►The projector uses a high-pressure mercury glass lamp. The lamp can break
with a loud bang, or burn out, if jolted or scratched, handled while hot, or worn
over time. Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and some may burst or
burn out soon after you start using them. In addition, when the bulb bursts, it is
possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing, and for gas containing
mercury to escape from the projector’s vent holes.
►About disposal of a lamp • This product contains a mercury lamp; do not
put it in a trash. Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws.
For lamp recycling, go to www.lamprecycle.org. (in the US)
For product disposal, contact your local government agency or www.eiae.org (in
the US) or www.epsc.ca (in Canada).
For more information, call your dealer.
• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does), unplug
the power cord from the outlet, and make sure to request a replacement
lamp from your local dealer. Note that shards of glass could damage the
inside of the projector, or cause injury during handling, so please do not
try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself.
Disconnect
the plug
from the
power
• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does),
ventilate the room well, and make sure not to breathe the gas that
comes out of the projector vents, or get it in your eyes or mouth.
• Before replacing the lamp, turn the projector off and unplug the power
outlet
cord, then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently.
Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns, as well as damaging the
lamp.
• Never unscrew except the appointed (marked by an arrow) screws.
• Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from
the ceiling. This is dangerous, since if the lamp’s bulb has broken, the
shards will fall out when the cover is opened. In addition, working in
high places is dangerous, so ask your local dealer to have the lamp
replaced even if the bulb is not broken.
• Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed. To replace the
lamp, make sure that the screws are tightened firmly. Loose screws
could result in damage or injury.
• Use only the lamp of the specified type.
• If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used, it is possible
that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp. If this
happens, contact your local dealer or a service representative.
•
Handle with care: jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use.
• Using the lamp for long periods of time, could cause it dark, not to light
up or to burst. When the pictures appear dark, or when the color tone
is poor, please replace the lamp as soon as possible. Do not use old
(used) lamps; this is a cause of breakage.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Lamp (continued)
A lamp has a finite product life. Using the lamp for long periods of time could
cause the pictures darker or the color tone poor. Note that each lamp has a
different lifetime, and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them.
Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended.
To prepare a new lamp, contact your dealer and tell the lamp type number.
Type number = 456-8776 and 456-8755E.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the lamp to cool for
at least 45 minutes.
ꢀ.
Prepare a new lamp.
If the projector is mounted on the ceiling, or if the lamp has broken, also ask
the dealer to replace the lamp.
ꢁ.
Lamp cover
In the case of replacement by yourself,
Loosen the lamp cover screw (marked by arrow)
and then slide the lamp cover to the side to
remove it.
CB
/PB
C
3.
R/PR
RGB IN
A
VI
UDIO IN
D
A
1
EO
S-VI
UDIO IN
1
2
D
EO
RGB IN
LA
N
2
RG
B
OU
C
A
IN
CO
T
NT
R
OL
AUDIO OU
T
US
B
Loosen the ꢁ screws (marked by arrow) of the
lamp, and slowly pick up the lamp by the handles.
4.
Screw
Screws
Insert the new lamp, and retighten firmly the two
screws that are loosened in the previous process
to lock it in place.
5.
Slide the lamp cover back in place and firmly
fasten the lamp cover a screw.
6.
Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time
using the LAMP TIME function in the OPTION
7.
(
41)
menu
.
Handle
(ꢀ) Press the MENU button to display a menu. Only
when the EASY MENU has appeared, please
perform the next step (ꢁ).
V
W
0
0
7
8
E
2
G
R
A
E
T
L
W
O
O
V
P
Y
B PB
C
/
L
C
/
R PR
AU
DIO
IN
2
AU
DIO
I
N1
RG
B
S-V
I
N2
(ꢁ) Point at the “Go to Advanced Menu …” in the menu
using ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button.
(3) Point at the “OPTION” in the left column of the
menu using ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button.
(4) Point at the ”LAMP TIME” using ▼/▲ button, then
press the ► button. A dialog will appear.
IDE
O
LA
RG
N
B
O
UT
CO
AU
DIO
NT
RO
O
U
L
T
US
B
(5) Press the ▲ button to select “RESET” on the
dialog. It performs resetting the lamp time.
NOTE • Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp,
for a suitable indication about the lamp.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Air filter
WARNING ►Before caring, make sure the power switch is off and the
power cable is not plugged in, then allow the projector to cool sufficiently. The
care in a high temperature state of the projector could cause an electric shock,
a burn and/or malfunction to the projector.
►Use only the air filter of the specified type. Do not use the projector with the
air filter and the filter cover removed. It could result in a fire and/or malfunction
to the projector.
►The air filter should be cleaned periodically. If the air filter becomes clogged
by dust or the like, internal temperatures rise and could cause a fire, a burn
and/or malfunction to the projector.
NOTE • Please replace the air filter when it is damaged or too soiled, and
also when you replace the lamp.
• Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air
( 41)
filter, for a suitable indication about the air filter.
• The projector may display the message such as “CHECK THE AIR FLOW” or
turn off the projector, to prevent the internal heat level rising.
If the air filter becomes clogged by dust or the like, internal temperatures rise and
could cause a fire, a burn and/or malfunction to the projector. When the indicators
or a message prompts you to clean the air filter, clean the air filter as soon as
possible.
Please check and clean the air filter periodically, even if there is no message.
Please replace the air filter when it is damaged or too soiled. Preparation of a new
air filter is recommended.
To prepare a new air filter, contact your dealer and tell the air filter type number.
Type number = NJ22222
And also when you replace the lamp, please replace the air filter. An air filter of
specified type will come together with a replacement lamp for this projector.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the
power cord. Allow the lamp to cool for at
least 45 minutes.
ꢀ.
Handle
When the projector is suspended from
Filter cover
ꢁ.
the ceiling, apply the vacuum cleaner to
and around the filter cover first, to prevent
penetration of dust or the like.
While supporting the projector with one
3.
hand, use your other hand to pull the filter
cover forward in the direction of the arrow.
Remove the air filter.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Air filter (continued)
Apply a vacuum cleaner to the air filter
and the filter cover. Please replace the air
filter when it is damaged or too soiled.
4.
Replace the air filter in its original
5.
position. Secure the air filter in place by
pressing each of the six locations.
Make sure there is no dust or dirt
remaining after the cover is in place. If any
dust or dirt remains use a vacuum cleaner
to remove it as when placing the filter
cover on the air filter.
Air filter’s
knob
Reattach the filter cover to the projector by
aligning the filter cover with the grooves
on the projector. While holding the handle,
push down on the filter cover until it locks
firmly in place.
mark
Air filter
Filter cover
Turn the projector on and reset the filter
6.
time using the FILTER TIME function in the
(
41)
.
OPTION menu
(ꢀ) Press the MENU button to display a menu. When the EASY MENU has
appeared, please skip the next step (ꢁ).
(2) Point at the “OPTION” in the left column of the menu using ▼/▲ button, then
press the ► button.
(3) Point at the “FILTER TIME” using ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button. A
dialog will appear.
(4) Press the ▲ button to select “RESET” on the dialog. It performs resetting the
filter time.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
RJ Model Only.
Replacing Internal Clock battery
Consumption of the battery makes the clock not to work correctly. When the clock is wrong or it has
stopped, please replace the battery according to the following procedures.
WARNING ►Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as directed. Battery
may explode if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire.
And also improper use may result in cracking or leakage, which could result in fire, injury and/or
pollution of the surrounding environment.
•
Be sure to use only the batteries specified. Do not use batteries of different types at the same
time. Do not mix a new battery with used one.
Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery.
If the battery is placed in the battery holder upside-down, it may be hard to remove.
•
•
•
•
•
Keep a battery away from children and pets. If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment.
Do not short circuit or solder a battery.
Do not allow a battery in a fire or water. Keep batteries in a dark, cool and dry place.
If you observe a leakage of a battery, wipe out the flower and then replace a battery. If the liquid
adheres to your body or clothes, rinse well with water immediately.
Obey the local laws on disposing the battery.
•
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the
ꢀ.
ꢁ.
3.
projector to cool sufficiently.
EN
OP
E
CLOS
B
U S
T
U
O
O
L
U D I
O
R
A
T
O U
C O N T
B
R G
After making sure that the projector has cooled adequately,
slowly turn over the projector, so that the bottom is facing.
2
I N
B
O
N
R G
D E
L A
2
- V I
1
I N
S
I N
O
O
I
1
U D
U D I
A
E O
D
N
A
I
V I
B
R G
R
B
/ P R C
/ P
B C
3
U
D
I
O
I
N
A
Y
Remove the battery cover.
Turn the battery cover in the direction indicated “OPEN”
using such as coins. Then the battery cover will come up. While
removing the battery cover, pick its knob.
Battery Cover
OPEN
Take the old battery out.
Press the metal claw of the battery holder. Then the battery
will come up. Remove the battery.
4.
Knob
Metal claw
Put a new battery in.
5.
Replace battery with HITACHI MAXELL, Part No.CR2032
only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or
explosion.
“+” marking
Insert a new battery in the battery holder according to its minus terminal
as indicated in the battery holder, so that the side marked by
facing. And push the battery into the battery holder fully to fix.
+
is
CLOSE
Close the battery cover.
6.
Replace the battery cover in place, then turn it in the
direction indicated “CLOSE” using such as coins, to fix.
If the battery is placed in the battery holder upside-down, follow the procedure below to remove
and reload it properly.
ꢀ. Remove the battery cover as described in steps ꢀ through 3 above.
ꢁ. Turn the projector over again, so that the top of the projector is facing up.
3. While lifting the side of the projector closest to the lens, press the metal claw of the battery
holder. The battery will fall out of the holder, so be careful not to lose it.
4. Turn the projector over once more, so that the bottom faces up, and reload the battery correctly.
NOTE • The internal clock’s time will be reset when the battery is removed.
Please reconfigure the time via the menu or a web browser after replacing the battery.
(Please refer to
51 and User’s Manual-Network Functions: Date/Time Settings for more information.)
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Other care
WARNING ►Before caring, make sure the power switch is off and the
power cable is not plugged in, and then allow the projector to cool sufficiently.
The care in a high temperature state of the projector could cause a burn and/or
malfunction to the projector.
►Never try to care for the inside of the projector personally. Doing is so
dangerous.
►Avoid wetting the projector or inserting liquids in the projector. It could result
in a fire, an electric shock, and/or malfunction to the projector.
• Do not put a container containing water, cleaner or chemicals near the
projector.
• Do not use aerosols or sprays.
CAUTION ►Please take right care of the projector according to the
following. Incorrect care could cause not only an injury but adverse influence
such as discoloration, peeling paint, etc.
►Do not use cleaner or chemicals other than those listed below.
►Do not polish or wipe with hard objects.
Inside of the projector
In order to ensure the safe use of your projector, please have it cleaned and
inspected by your dealer about once every year.
Caring for the lens
If the lens is flawed, soiled or fogged, it could cause deterioration of display
quality. Please take care of the lens, being cautious of handling.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool
sufficiently.
ꢀ.
After making sure that the projector is cool adequately, lightly wipe the lens
with a commercially available lens-cleaning wipe. Do not touch the lens
directly with your hand.
ꢁ.
Caring for the cabinet and remote control
Incorrect care could have adverse influence such as discoloration, peeling paint,
etc.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool
sufficiently.
ꢀ.
After making sure that the projector is cool adequately, lightly wipe with gauze
or a soft cloth.
If soiling is severe, dip soft cloth in water or a neutral cleaner diluted in water,
and wipe lightly after wringing well. Then, wipe lightly with a soft, dry cloth.
ꢁ.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Related messages
When the unit's power is on, messages such as those shown below may be
displayed. When any such message is displayed on the screen, please follow the
instructions described below. If the same message is displayed after the remedy,
or if a message other than the following appears, please contact your dealer or
service company.
Although these messages will be automatically disappeared around several
minutes, it will be reappeared every time the power is turned on.
Message
Description
There is no input signal.
Please confirm the signal input connection, and the status
NO INPUT IS DETECTED
of the signal source.
The horizontal or vertical frequency of the input signal
is not within the specified range.
SYNC IS OUT OF RANGE
Please confirm the specs for your projector or the signal
fH kHz fV Hz
source specs.
The internal temperature is rising.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool
down at least 20 minutes. After having confirmed the
following items, please turn the power ON again.
• Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?
• Is the air filter dirty?
CHECK THE AIR FLOW
• Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C?
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy, please set
FAN SPEED of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu to HIGH.
REMINDER
*** HRS PASSED AFTER THE
LAST FILTER CHECK.
A note of precaution when cleaning the air filter.
Please immediately turn the power off, and clean or change
the air filter referring to the “Air Filter” section of this manual
FILTER MAINTENANCE IS ESSENTIAL
TO REMOVE WARNING MESSAGE,
RESET FILTER TIMER.
(
55). After you have cleaned or changed the air filter,
please be sure to reset the filter timer ( 41).
SEE MANUAL FURTHER INFO.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Regarding the indicator lamps
Lighting and flashing of the POWER indicator, the LAMP indicator, and the TEMP
indicator have the meanings as described in the table below. Please follow the
instructions within the table. If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,
or if an indication other than the following is displayed, please contact your dealer
or service company.
POWER
indicator indicator indicator
LAMP
TEMP
Description
Lighting
In Orange
Turned
off
Turned
off
The projector is in a standby state.
Please refer to the section “Power On/Off”.
Blinking
In Green
Turned
off
Turned
off
The projector is warming up.
Please wait.
Lighting
In Green
Turned
off
Turned
off
The projector is in an on state.
Ordinary operations may be performed.
Blinking
In Orange
Turned
off
Turned
off
The projector is cooling down.
Please wait.
The projector is cooling down. A certain error
has been detected.
Please wait until the POWER indicator finishes
blinking, and then perform the proper measure using
the item descriptions below.
Blinking
In Red
(discre- (discre-
tionary) tionary)
The lamp does not light, and there is a
possibility that interior portion has become
heated.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to
cool down at least ꢁ0 minutes. After the projector has
Lighting Turned sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of
Blinking
In Red
or
Lighting
In Red
In Red
off
the following items, and then turn the power on again.
• Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?
• Is the air filter dirty?
• Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C?
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,
please change the lamp referring to the section “Lamp”.
The lamp cover has not been properly fixed.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to
cool down at least 45 minutes. After the projector has
sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation
of the attachment state of the lamp cover. After
performing any needed maintenance, turn the power
on again. If the same indication is displayed after
the remedy, please contact your dealer or service
company.
Blinking
In Red
or
Lighting
In Red
Blinking Turned
In Red off
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Regarding the indicator lamps (continued)
POWER
indicator indicator indicator
LAMP
TEMP
Description
The cooling fan is not operating.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to
cool down at least ꢁ0 minutes. After the projector has
Turned Blinking sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation
Blinking
In Red
or
Lighting
In Red
off
In Red that no foreign matter has become caught in the fan,
etc., and then turn the power on again.
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,
please contact your dealer or service company.
There is a possibility that the interior portion
has become heated.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to
cool down at least ꢁ0 minutes. After the projector has
sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of
Blinking
In Red
or
Lighting
In Red
Turned Lighting the following items, and then turn the power on again.
off
In Red • Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?
• Is the air filter dirty?
• Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C?
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,
please set FAN SPEED of the SERVICE item in the
OPTION menu to HIGH.
It is time to clean the air filter.
Please immediately turn the power off, and clean or
Lighting
In Green
Simultaneous
blinking in Red
change the air filter referring to the section “Air Filter”.
After cleaning or changing the air filter, please be sure
to reset the filter timer. After the remedy, reset the
power to ON.
There is a possibility that the interior portion
has become overcooled.
Please use the unit within the usage temperature
parameters (5°C to 35°C). After the treatment, reset
the power to ON.
Lighting
In Green
Alternative
blinking in Red
Blinking in
Green for Turned
approx. 3
seconds
At least 1 “Power ON” schedule is saved to the
projector.
(Please refer to the User’s Manual-Network Functions:
Schedule Settings for more information.)
Turned
off
off
NOTE • When the interior portion has become overheated, for safety
purposes, the power source is automatically turned off, and the indicator lamps
may also be turned off. In such a case, press the “” (OFF) side of the power
switch, and wait at least 45 minutes. After the projector has sufficiently cooled
down, please make confirmation of the attachment state of the lamp and lamp
cover, and then turn the power on again.
6ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects
WARNING ►Never use the projector if abnormal operations such as
smoke, strange odor, excessive sound, damaged casing or elements or cables,
penetration of liquids or foreign matter, etc. should occur. In such cases,
immediately turn off the power switch and then disconnect the power plug from
the power outlet. After making sure that the smoke or odor has stopped, contact
your dealer or service company.
Before requesting repair, please check in
accordance with the following chart. This
operation sometimes resolves your problem.
CB
/PB
ꢀ.
C
R/P
RGB IN
UDIO
A
VI
D
A
EO
S-VI
UDIO IN
2
D
EO
RGB IN
LA
N
A
2
RG
B
OU
CO
T
NT
R
OL
UDIO OU
If the situation cannot be corrected,
T
US
B
The projector’s microprocessor may need to be
reset. Please push the Restart switch by using a cocktail stick or similar and
the projector will restart.
ꢁ.
Some setting may be wrong. Please use the FACTORY RESET function of the
3.
(
43)
to reset all settings to factory default.
SERVICE item in the OPTION menu
Then, if the problem is not removed after the remedy, please contact your dealer
or service company.
Reference
page
Phenomenon
Cases not involving a machine defect
The electrical power cord is not plugged in.
Correctly connect the power cord.
ꢀ4
The power switch is not set to the on position.
Set the power switch to [ | ] (On).
ꢀ7
ꢀ7
The main power source has been interrupted during
operation such as by a power outage (blackout), etc.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool
down at least ꢁ minutes, then turn the power on again.
Power does not
come on.
Either there is no lamp and/or lamp cover, or either
of these has not been properly fixed.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool down
at least 45 minutes. After the projector has sufficiently cooled
down, please make confirmation of the attachment state of the
lamp and lamp cover, and then turn the power on again.
53, 54
The signal cables are not correctly connected.
Correctly connect the connection cables.
ꢀꢁ, ꢀ3
–
Signal source does not correctly work.
Correctly set up the signal source device by referring to the
manual of the source device.
Neither sounds
nor pictures are
outputted.
The input changeover settings are mismatched.
Select the input signal, and correct the settings.
ꢀ8, ꢀ9
6ꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued)
Reference
Phenomenon
Cases not involving a machine defect
page
The signal cables are not correctly connected.
Correctly connect the audio cables.
ꢀꢁ,ꢀ3
The MUTE function is working.
Restore the sound pressing the MUTE or VOLUME button
on the remote control.
ꢀ8
ꢀ8
Sound does not
come out.
The volume is adjusted to an extremely low level.
Adjust the volume to a higher level using the menu function
or the remote control.
The AUDIO setting is not correct.
Correctly set the AUDIO item in the SETUP menu.
36
ꢀ7
The lens cap is attached.
Remove the lens cover.
The signal cables are not correctly connected.
Correctly connect the connection cables.
ꢀꢁ, ꢀ3
The brightness is adjusted to an extremely low level.
Adjust BRIGHTNESS to a higher level using the menu
function or the remote control.
ꢁ5
ꢀꢀ
No pictures are
displayed.
The computer cannot detect the projector as a plug
and play monitor.
Make sure that the computer can detect a plug and play
monitor using another plug and play monitor.
The BLANK screen is displayed.
Press the BLANK button on the remote control.
ꢁꢁ
ꢁꢁ
The FREEZE function is working.
Press the FREEZE button to restore the screen to normal.
Video screen
display freezes.
Color settings are not correctly adjusted.
Perform picture adjustments by changing the COLOR
TEMP, COLOR, TINT and/or COLOR SPACE settings,
using the menu functions.
ꢁ6, ꢁ8,
3ꢁ
Colors have a
faded- out
appearance, or
Color tone is
poor.
COLOR SPACE setting is not suitable.
Change the COLOR SPACE setting to AUTO, RGB,
SMPTEꢁ40, REC709 or REC60ꢀ.
3ꢁ
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued)
Reference
page
Phenomenon
Cases not involving a machine defect
The brightness and/or contrast are adjusted to an
extremely low level.
Adjust BRIGHTNESS and/or CONTRAST settings to a
higher level using the menu function.
ꢁ5, ꢁ6
The WHISPER function is working.
Select NORMAL for the WHISPER item in the SETUP
menu.
Pictures appear
dark.
ꢁ6, 35
53, 54
The lamp is approaching the end of its product
lifetime.
Replace the lamp.
Either the focus and/or horizontal phase settings are
not properly adjusted.
Adjust the focus using the focus ring, and/or H PHASE
using the menu function.
ꢀ9, 30
58
Pictures appear
blurry.
The lens is dirty or misty.
Clean the lens referring to the section “Caring for the lens”.
NOTE • Although bright spots or dark spots may appear on the screen, this
is a unique characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and it does not constitute or
imply a machine defect.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warranty And After-Service
Warranty and after-service
If a problem occurs with the equipment, first refer to the “Troubleshooting” and run
through the suggested checks. If this does not resolve the problem, please contact your
dealer or service company. They will tell you what warranty condition is applied.
Specifications
Specifications
NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Item
Specification
Product name
Liquid crystal projector
ꢀ.6 cm (0.63 type)
Panel size
Liquid
Crystal Drive system TFT active matrix
panel
Pixels
786,43ꢁ pixels (ꢀ0ꢁ4 horizontal x 768 vertical)
Lens
Zoom lens F=ꢀ.7 ~ ꢀ.9 f=ꢀ8.9 ~ ꢁꢁ.6 mm
Lamp
ꢁ00W UHB
Speaker
ꢀW x ꢀ
Power Supply
ACꢀ00-ꢀꢁ0V/3.5A, ACꢁꢁ0-ꢁ40V/ꢀ.5A
330W
Power Consumption
Temperature range
5 ~ 35°C (Operating)
306 (W) x 86 (H) x 249 (D) mm, RJ is 106 (H) mm.
(Not including protruding parts)
Size
• Please refer to the following figure.
Weight (mass)
3.3 kg
RGB input:
Video input:
RGB INꢀ..D-sub ꢀ5pin mini xꢀ COMPONENT VIDEO
RGB INꢁ..D-sub ꢀ5pin mini xꢀ
RGB output:
(Y, CB/PB, CR/PR)...... RCA x3
S-Video ................Mini DIN xꢀ
RGB OUT..D-sub ꢀ5pin mini xꢀ Video .......................... RCA xꢀ
Audio input: Communication port:
Ports
AUDIO ꢀ...........Stereo mini xꢀ CONTROL............D-sub 9pin xꢀ
AUDIO ꢁ...........Stereo mini xꢀ USB........................USB(B) xꢀ
AUDIO 3..................... RCA xꢁ LAN .......................... RJ-45 xꢀ
Audio output:
AUDIO OUT ....Stereo mini xꢀ
456-8776, 8755E-RJ is 456-8755E
Lamp
4
Optional
Air filter
parts
NJꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁ
Others
• Please consult your dealer.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Specifications (continued)
S - V I D E O
V I D E O
U S B
O L
C O N T R
R
B
/ P R
C
U A D I O I N 2
L
/ P B
C
U A D I O I N 1
R G B I N 1
U A D I O O U T
L A N
R G B O U T
R G B I N 2
R
Y
U A D I O I N 3
306 mm
Note: The non RJ Model (8776) is 86 and 100mm high.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Projector
8755E-RJ, 8776 & 8776-RJ
User's Manual – Operating Guide
Technical
Example of computer signal
Resolution (H x V) H. frequency (kHz) V. frequency (Hz)
Rating
Signal mode
7ꢁ0 x 400
640 x 480
640 x 480
640 x 480
640 x 480
800 x 600
800 x 600
800 x 600
800 x 600
800 x 600
83ꢁ x 6ꢁ4
ꢀ0ꢁ4 x 768
ꢀ0ꢁ4 x 768
ꢀ0ꢁ4 x 768
ꢀ0ꢁ4 x 768
ꢀꢀ5ꢁ x 864
ꢀꢁ80 x 960
ꢀꢁ80 x ꢀ0ꢁ4
ꢀꢁ80 x ꢀ0ꢁ4
ꢀꢁ80 x ꢀ0ꢁ4
ꢀ600 x ꢀꢁ00
ꢀꢁ80 x 768
ꢀ400 x ꢀ050
37.9
3ꢀ.5
37.9
37.5
43.3
35.ꢁ
37.9
48.ꢀ
46.9
53.7
49.7
48.4
56.5
60.0
68.7
67.5
60.0
64.0
80.0
9ꢀ.ꢀ
75.0
47.7
65.ꢁ
85.0
59.9
7ꢁ.8
75.0
85.0
56.3
60.3
7ꢁ.ꢁ
75.0
85.ꢀ
74.5
60.0
70.ꢀ
75.0
85.0
75.0
60.0
60.0
75.0
85.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
TEXT
VGA (60Hz)
VGA (7ꢁHz)
VGA (75Hz)
VGA (85Hz)
SVGA (56Hz)
SVGA (60Hz)
SVGA (7ꢁHz)
SVGA (75Hz)
SVGA (85Hz)
Mac ꢀ6” mode
XGA (60Hz)
XGA (70Hz)
XGA (75Hz)
XGA (85Hz)
ꢀꢀ5ꢁ x 864 (75Hz)
ꢀꢁ80 x 960 (60Hz)
SXGA (60Hz)
SXGA (75Hz)
SXGA (85Hz)
UXGA (60Hz)
W-XGA (60Hz)
SXGA+ (60Hz)
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
NOTE • Be sure to check jack type, signal level, timing and resolution
before connecting this projector to a computer.
• Some computers may have multiple display screen modes. Use of some of
these modes will not be possible with this projector.
• Depending on the input signal, full-size display may not be possible in some
cases. Refer to the number of display pixels above.
• Although the projector can display signals with resolution up to UXGA
(ꢀ600xꢀꢁ00), the signal will be converted to the projector’s panel resolution
before being displayed. The best display performance will be achieved if the
resolutions of the input signal and projector panel are identical.
• Automatically adjustment may not function correctly with some input signals.
• The image may not be displayed correctly when the input sync signal is a
composite sync or a sync on G.
ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Eꢀample of computer signal
Initial set signals
The following signals are used for the initial settings. The signal timing of some
computer models may be different. In such case, adjust the items V POSITION
and H POSITION in the IMAGE menu.
Back porch (B)
Front porch (D)
Back porch (b)
Front porch (d)
ꢀisꢁꢂaꢃ interꢄaꢂ (ꢅ)
ꢀisꢁꢂaꢃ interꢄaꢂ (c)
Data
Data
V. Sync.
H. Sync.
Sync (A)
Sync (a)
Horizontal signal timing (μs)
Vertical signal timing (lines)
Computer/
Computer/
Signal
Signal
(A)
ꢁ.0
3.8
ꢀ.3
ꢁ.0
ꢀ.6
(B)
(C)
(D)
(a)
3
ꢁ
3
3
3
ꢁ
4
6
3
3
3
6
6
3
3
(b)
4ꢁ
33
ꢁ8
ꢀ6
ꢁ5
ꢁꢁ
ꢁ3
ꢁ3
ꢁꢀ
ꢁ7
39
ꢁ9
ꢁ9
ꢁ8
36
(c)
(d)
ꢀ
ꢀ0
9
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
37
ꢀ
ꢀ
TEXT
3.0 ꢁ0.3 ꢀ.0
ꢀ.9 ꢁ5.4 0.6
4.ꢀ ꢁ0.3 0.8
3.8 ꢁ0.3 0.5
ꢁ.ꢁ ꢀ7.8 ꢀ.6
3.6 ꢁꢁ.ꢁ 0.7
ꢁ.ꢁ ꢁ0.0 ꢀ.0
ꢀ.3 ꢀ6.0 ꢀ.ꢀ
3.ꢁ ꢀ6.ꢁ 0.3
ꢁ.7 ꢀ4.ꢁ 0.6
3.9 ꢀ4.5 0.6
ꢁ.5 ꢀ5.8 0.4
ꢀ.9 ꢀ3.7 0.3
ꢁ.ꢁ ꢀ3.0 0.ꢁ
ꢁ.ꢁ ꢀ0.8 0.5
TEXT
400
480
480
480
480
600
600
600
600
600
6ꢁ4
768
768
768
768
VGA (60Hz)
VGA (7ꢁHz)
VGA (75Hz)
VGA (85Hz)
VGA (60Hz)
VGA (7ꢁHz)
VGA (75Hz)
VGA (85Hz)
SVGA (56Hz)
SVGA (60Hz)
SVGA (7ꢁHz)
SVGA (75Hz)
SVGA (85Hz)
Mac ꢀ6" mode
XGA (60Hz)
XGA (70Hz)
XGA (75Hz)
XGA (85Hz)
SVGA (56Hz) ꢁ.0
SVGA (60Hz) 3.ꢁ
SVGA (7ꢁHz) ꢁ.4
SVGA (75Hz) ꢀ.6
SVGA (85Hz) ꢀ.ꢀ
Mac ꢀ6" mode ꢀ.ꢀ
ꢀ
3
3
ꢀ
XGA (60Hz)
XGA (70Hz)
XGA (75Hz)
XGA (85Hz)
ꢁ.ꢀ
ꢀ.8
ꢀ.ꢁ
ꢀ.0
ꢀ
ꢀꢀ5ꢁ x 864
(75Hz)
ꢀꢁ80 x 960
(60Hz)
ꢀꢀ5ꢁ x 864
(75Hz)
ꢀꢁ80 x 960
(60Hz)
ꢀ.ꢁ
ꢀ.0
ꢁ.4 ꢀ0.7 0.6
3
3
3ꢁ
36
864
960
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢁ.9
ꢀꢀ.9
0.9
SXGA (60Hz) ꢀ.0
SXGA (75Hz) ꢀ.ꢀ
SXGA (85Hz) ꢀ.0
UXGA (60Hz) ꢀ.ꢁ
W-XGA (60Hz) ꢀ.7
SXGA+ (60Hz) ꢀ.ꢁ
ꢁ.3
ꢀ.8
ꢀ.4
ꢀ.9
ꢀꢀ.9
9.5
8.ꢀ
9.9
0.4
0.ꢀ
0.4
0.4
SXGA(60Hz)
SXGA (75Hz)
SXGA (85Hz)
UXGA (60Hz)
W-XGA (60Hz)
SXGA+ (60Hz)
3
3
3
3
3
3
38 ꢀ0ꢁ4
38 ꢀ0ꢁ4
44 ꢀ0ꢁ4
46 ꢀꢁ00
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢁ.5 ꢀ6.0 0.8
ꢁ.0 ꢀꢀ.4 0.7
ꢁ3
768
33 ꢀ050
ꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connection to the ports
Connection to the ports
LAN
RJ Only.
C
A
B
AUDIO IN3
R
Y
RGB IN1
RGB IN2
CONTROL
RGB OUT AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN1
C
B
/
/
P
B
R
L
AUDIO IN2
CR
P
K
USB
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
A
B
C
RGB IN1, RGB IN2, RGB OUT
D-sub ꢀ5pin mini shrink jack
5
4
3
ꢁ
ꢀ
ꢀ0
9
8
7
6
• Video signal: RGB separate, Analog, 0.7Vp-p,
ꢀ5 ꢀ4 ꢀ3 ꢀꢁ ꢀꢀ
75Ω terminated (positive)
• H/V. sync. Signal: TTL level (positive/negative)
• Composite sync. Signal: TTL level
At RGB signal
Pin
ꢀ
Signal
Video Red
ꢁ
3
Video Green
Video Blue
4
5
(No connection)
Ground
6
7
8
9
Ground Red
Ground Green
Ground Blue
(No connection)
ꢀ0 Ground
ꢀꢀ (No connection)
A
ꢀꢁ
B C
: SDA (DDC data),
/
: (No connection)
B C
: (No connection)
ꢀ3 H. sync / Composite sync.
ꢀ4 V. sync.
A
ꢀ5
: SCL (DDC clock),
/
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connection to the ports
LAN
AUDIO IN3
R
Y
ꢁ
RGB IN1
RGB IN2
RGB OUT AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN1
EB
/PB
L
AUDIO IN2
/PR
CONTROL
ꢂ
F
K
USB
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
G
D
E
F
COMPONENT VIDEO Y, CB/PB,
CR/PR
RCA jack x3
• System: 5ꢁ5i(480i), 5ꢁ5p(480p), 6ꢁ5i(576i), 750p(7ꢁ0p), ꢀꢀꢁ5i(ꢀ080i)
Port
Y
Signal
Component video Y, 1.0±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminator with composite
B
CB/P Component video CB/PB, 0.7±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminator
R
R
C /P Component video CR/PR, 0.7±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminator
G
S-VIDEO
ꢀ
ꢁ
Mini DIN 4pin jack
3
4
Pin
Signal
Color signal 0.286Vp-p (NTSC, burst), 75Ω terminator
Color signal 0.300Vp-p (PAL/SECAM, burst) 75Ω terminator
Brightness signal, 1.0Vp-p, 75Ω terminator
Ground
Ground
ꢀ
ꢁ
3
4
H
VIDEO
RCA jack
• System: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, PAL-M, PAL-N, NTSC4.43
• 1.0±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminator
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connection to the ports
LAN
I
AUDIO IN3
R
Y
L
M
GB IN1
RGB IN2
RGB OUT AUDIO OUT
ꢃ
O
K
AO IN1
AUDIO IN2
CB/PB
CR/PR
L
N
CONTROL
K
USB
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
I
J
K L
ꢂ3.5 stereo mini jack),
AUDIO IN-1 (
,
AUDIO IN-2
AUDIO 3 L/R (RCA jack)
• 200mVrms(max.) 35kΩ termination
M
ꢂ3.5 stereo mini jack)
AUDIO OUT (
• 200mVrms(max.) 1kΩ output impedance
Pin
Signal
N
USB
4
ꢀ
3
ꢁ
ꢀ
ꢁ
3
4
+5V
USB B type jack
- Data
+ Data
Ground
O
CONTROL
D-sub 9pin plug
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
ꢁ
ꢀ
• About the details of RS-ꢁ3ꢁC communication, please refer to the following page.
Pin
ꢀ
Signal
(No connection)
Pin
4
Signal
(No connection)
Ground
Pin
7
Signal
RTS
CTS
ꢁ
3
RD
TD
5
6
8
9
(No connection)
(No connection)
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connection to the ports
P
LAN
AUDIO IN3
R
Y
RGB IN1
RGB IN2
RGB OUT AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN1
CB/PB
CR/PR
L
AUDIO IN2
CONTROL
K
USB
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
P
LAN
8776-RJ Only (RJ-45 jack).
RJ-45 jack
ꢀ
ꢁ
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pin
ꢀ
Signal
TX+
Pin
4
Signal
Pin
7
Signal
-
-
-
-
ꢁ
TX-
5
8
3
RX+
6
RX-
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication ꢄcontinuedꢅ
RS-ꢁ3ꢁC Communication
ꢀ
ꢁ
3
4
5
ꢀ
ꢁ
3
4
5
6
6
8
8
7
9
7
9
CONTROL port
of the projector
RS-ꢁ3ꢁC cable (Cross)
RS-ꢁ3ꢁC port
of the computer
- (ꢀ)
RD (ꢁ)
TD (3)
- (4)
(ꢀ) CD
(ꢁ) RD
(3) TD
(4) DTR
(5) GND
(6) DSR
(7) RTS
(8) DTS
(9) RI
GND (5)
- (6)
RTS (7)
CTS (8)
- (9)
Connecting the cable
ꢀ. Turn off the projector and the computer.
Connect the CONTROL port of the projector with a RS-ꢁ3ꢁC port of
the computer by a RS-ꢁ3ꢁC cable (cross). Use the cable that fulfills the
specification shown in the previous page.
ꢁ.
Turn the computer on, and after the computer has started up turn the
projector on.
3.
Communications setting
ꢀ9ꢁ00bps, 8Nꢀ
1 Protocol
Consist of header (7 bytes) + command data (6 bytes).
2 ꢂeader
BE + EF + 03 + 06 + 00 + CRC_low + CRC_high
CRC_low : Lower byte of CRC flag for command data
CRC_high : Upper byte of CRC flag for command data
3 Command data
Command data chart
byte_0
byte_ꢀ
byte_ꢁ
byte_3
high
byte_4
Setting code
low
byte_5
high
Action
Type
low
high
low
Action (byte_0 - ꢀ)
Action
Classification
Content
ꢀ
ꢁ
4
5
6
SET
GET
Change setting to desired value.
Read projector internal setup value.
INCREMENT Increment setup value by ꢀ.
DECREMENT Decrement setup value by ꢀ.
EXECUTE
Run a command.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication ꢄcontinuedꢅ
Requesting projector status (Get command)
(ꢀ) Send the request code Header + Command data (ꢃ0ꢁH’+ꢃ00H’+ type (ꢁ bytes)+
ꢃ00H’ +ꢃ00H’) from the computer to the projector.
(ꢁ) The projector returns the response code ꢃꢀDH’+ data (ꢁ bytes) to the computer.
Changing the projector settings (Set command)
(ꢀ) Send the setting code Header + Command data (ꢃ0ꢀH’+ꢃ00H’+ type (ꢁ bytes) +
setting code (ꢁ bytes)) from the computer to the projector.
(ꢁ) The projector changes the setting based on the above setting code.
(3) The projector returns the response code ꢃ06H’ to the computer.
Using the projector default settings (Reset Command)
(ꢀ) The computer sends the default setting code Header + Command data (ꢃ06H’+
ꢃ00H’ + type (ꢁ bytes) +ꢃ00H’+ꢃ00H’) to the projector.
(2) The projector changes the specified setting to the default value.
(3) The projector returns the response code ꢃ06H’ to the computer.
Increasing the projector setting value (Increment command)
(ꢀ) The computer sends the increment code Header + Command data (ꢃ04H’+
ꢃ00H’+ type (ꢁ bytes) +ꢃ00H’+ꢃ00H’) to the projector.
(ꢁ) The projector in creases the setting value on the above setting code.
(3) The projector returns the response code ꢃ06H’ to the computer.
Decreasing the projector setting value (Decrement command)
(ꢀ) The computer sends the decrement code Header + Command data (ꢃ05H’+
ꢃ00H’+ type (ꢁ bytes) +ꢃ00H’ + ꢃ00H’) to the projector.
(ꢁ) The projector decreases the setting value on the above setting code.
(3) The projector returns the response code ꢃ06H’ to the computer.
When the projector cannot understand the received command
When the projector cannot understand the received command, the error code ꢃꢀ5H’
is sent back to the computer.
Sometimes the projector cannot properly receive the command. In such a
case, the command is not executed and the error code ꢃꢀ5H’ is sent back to the
computer. If this error code is returned, send the same command again.
When the projector cannot execute the received command.
When the projector cannot execute the received command, the error code ꢃꢀCH’
+ ꢃxxxxH’ is sent back to the computer. When the data length is greater than
indicated by the data length code, the projector ignore the excess data code.
Conversely when the data length is shorter than indicated by the data length
code, an error code will be returned to the computer.
NOTE • Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an undefined
command or data.
• Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any other code.
• The projector outputs test data when the power supply is switched ON, and when the
lamp is lit. Ignore this data.
• Commands are not accepted during warm-up.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication ꢄcontinuedꢅ
ꢅommand ꢀata
ꢆames
Poꢇer
Oꢁeration Tꢃꢁe
Header
ꢅRꢅ
Action
Tꢃꢁe
Setting ꢅode
Set
Set
Tꢈrn oꢉꢉ
Tꢈrn on
Get
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢏA ꢀꢍ
ꢊA ꢀꢏ
ꢐꢑ ꢀꢍ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢎꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢎꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢎꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
(Eꢒamꢁꢂe retꢈrn)
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
(On)
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
(ꢅooꢂ doꢇn)
(Oꢉꢉ)
Inꢁꢈt Soꢈrce
Error Statꢈs
RGꢊ Iꢆ ꢐ
RGꢊ Iꢆ ꢏ
VIꢀEO
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢋE ꢀꢏ
ꢍE ꢀꢌ
ꢎE ꢀꢍ
ꢑE ꢀꢍ
AE ꢀꢐ
ꢅꢀ ꢀꢏ
ꢀꢑ ꢀꢖ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢏꢌ
ꢏꢌ ꢎꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
SꢔVIꢀEO
ꢅOMPOꢆEꢆT
Get
Get
(Eꢒamꢁꢂe retꢈrn)
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
(ꢅoꢄer error)
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
(ꢋan error)
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢍ ꢌꢌ
(Lamꢁ error)
ꢌꢗ ꢌꢌ
(ꢆormaꢂ)
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
(Temp error)
ꢌꢖ ꢌꢌ
(Air flow error)
(Lamp time error)
(Cool error)
ꢌꢑ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢌ ꢌꢌ
(ꢋiꢂter error) (ꢋiꢂter missing error)(Inner Sencer error)
ꢊRIGHTꢆESS
Get
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢖꢑ ꢀꢏ
Eꢋ ꢀꢏ
ꢍE ꢀꢍ
ꢕꢖ ꢀꢍ
ꢋꢀ ꢀꢍ
ꢑꢊ ꢀꢍ
ꢓA ꢀꢏ
Aꢓ ꢀꢏ
ꢏꢍ ꢋꢎ
ꢊꢍ ꢋꢗ
Eꢍ ꢋꢓ
Eꢍ Eꢋ
ꢗꢍ EE
ꢖꢍ EE
ꢐꢌ ꢋꢎ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢍ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢏꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢏꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢏꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
Increment
ꢀecrement
Eꢒecꢈte
ꢌꢍ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢍ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢗꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢗꢌ
ꢊA ꢍꢌ
ꢊA ꢍꢌ
ꢊA ꢍꢌ
ꢊA ꢍꢌ
ꢊA ꢍꢌ
ꢊA ꢍꢌ
ꢊA ꢍꢌ
ꢊRIGHTꢆESS Reset
ꢅOꢆTRAST
Get
Increment
ꢀecrement
Eꢒecꢈte
ꢅOꢆTRAST Reset
PIꢅTURE MOꢀE
Set
ꢆORMAL
ꢅIꢆEMA
ꢀꢘꢆAMIꢅ
ꢊOARꢀ(ꢊLAꢅꢙ)
ꢊOARꢀ(GREEꢆ)
ꢚHITEꢊOARꢀ
Get
(Eꢒamꢁꢂe retꢈrn)
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
(ꢅinema) (ꢀꢃnamic) (ꢅꢈstom)
ꢏꢐ ꢌꢌ ꢏꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢊOARꢀ(ꢊLAꢅꢙ) ꢊOARꢀ(GREEꢆ) (ꢚHITEꢊOARꢀ)
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢌ ꢌꢌ
(ꢆormaꢂ)
ꢏꢌ ꢌꢌ
GAMMA
Set
ꢛꢐ ꢀEꢋAULT
ꢛꢐ ꢅUSTOM
ꢛꢏ ꢀEꢋAULT
ꢛꢏ ꢅUSTOM
ꢛꢍ ꢀEꢋAULT
ꢛꢍ ꢅUSTOM
ꢛꢓ ꢀEꢋAULT
ꢛꢓ ꢅUSTOM
ꢛꢕ ꢀEꢋAULT
ꢛꢕ ꢅUSTOM
Get
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢗ Eꢑ
ꢌꢗ ꢋꢀ
ꢑꢗ Eꢖ
ꢑꢗ ꢋꢅ
ꢎꢗ Eꢖ
ꢎꢗ ꢋꢅ
ꢋꢗ Eꢑ
ꢋꢗ ꢋꢀ
ꢅꢗ Eꢊ
ꢅꢗ ꢋꢋ
ꢋꢓ ꢋꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
Aꢐ ꢍꢌ
Aꢐ ꢍꢌ
Aꢐ ꢍꢌ
Aꢐ ꢍꢌ
Aꢐ ꢍꢌ
Aꢐ ꢍꢌ
Aꢐ ꢍꢌ
Aꢐ ꢍꢌ
Aꢐ ꢍꢌ
Aꢐ ꢍꢌ
Aꢐ ꢍꢌ
ꢏꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢏꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢏꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢏꢍ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢍ ꢌꢌ
ꢏꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication ꢄcontinuedꢅ
ꢅommand ꢀata
ꢆames
Oꢁeration Tꢃꢁe
Header
ꢅRꢅ
Action
Tꢃꢁe
Setting ꢅode
User Gamma Pattern Set
Oꢉꢉ
ꢑ steꢁ graꢃ scaꢂe
ꢐꢕ steꢁs graꢃ scaꢂe
Ramꢁ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢋꢊ ꢋA
ꢎꢊ ꢋꢊ
ꢑꢊ ꢋꢊ
ꢌꢊ ꢋA
ꢅꢖ ꢋA
ꢌꢖ ꢋE
ꢎE ꢋE
ꢊꢋ ꢋꢋ
ꢋꢓ ꢋꢋ
ꢑꢏ ꢋꢋ
ꢓꢍ ꢋE
ꢊꢌ ꢋꢋ
ꢀꢎ ꢋꢋ
ꢌꢗ ꢋE
ꢓꢅ ꢋE
ꢏA ꢋE
ꢋꢊ ꢋꢋ
ꢍꢖ ꢋꢋ
ꢕE ꢋꢋ
ꢖꢋ ꢋE
ꢅꢓ ꢋE
Aꢏ ꢋE
ꢗꢍ ꢋꢋ
ꢖꢌ ꢋE
Eꢎ ꢋE
ꢍꢗ ꢋꢋ
ꢗꢅ ꢋꢋ
ꢐA ꢋꢋ
ꢅꢊ ꢋE
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢖꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢖꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢖꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢖꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢖꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢐ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢐ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢐ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢏ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢏ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢏ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢍ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢍ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢍ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢓ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢓ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢓ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢎ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢎ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢎ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢗ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢗ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢗ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢍ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
Get
User Gamma Point ꢐ
User Gamma Point ꢏ
User Gamma Point ꢍ
User Gamma Point ꢓ
User Gamma Point ꢕ
User Gamma Point ꢎ
User Gamma Point ꢗ
User Gamma Point ꢖ
Get
Increment
ꢀecrement
Get
Increment
ꢀecrement
Get
Increment
ꢀecrement
Get
Increment
ꢀecrement
Get
Increment
ꢀecrement
Get
Increment
ꢀecrement
Get
Increment
ꢀecrement
Get
Increment
ꢀecrement
ꢅOLOR TEMP
Set
LOꢚ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢎꢊ ꢋꢓ
ꢑꢊ ꢋꢓ
ꢌꢊ ꢋꢕ
ꢍꢊ ꢋꢏ
Aꢊ ꢋꢍ
Aꢊ ꢋꢑ
ꢕꢊ ꢋꢑ
ꢅꢊ ꢋꢖ
ꢋꢊ ꢋꢋ
ꢎꢊ ꢋE
ꢅꢖ ꢋꢕ
ꢍꢓ ꢋꢓ
ꢕꢏ ꢋꢓ
ꢖꢍ ꢋꢕ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢊꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢐ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢐ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢐ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢍ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢖ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢑ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢍ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢖ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢑ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
MIꢀꢀLE
HIGH
HiꢔꢊRIGHTꢔꢐ
HiꢔꢊRIGHTꢔꢏ
ꢅUSTOMꢔLOꢚ
ꢅUSTOMꢔMIꢀ
ꢅUSTOMꢔHIGH
ꢅUSTOMꢔHiꢔꢊRIGHTꢔꢐ ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢅUSTOMꢔHiꢔꢊRIGHTꢔꢏ ꢊE Eꢋ
Get
Get
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢅOLOR TEMP GAIꢆ R
Increment
ꢀecrement
ꢀ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication ꢄcontinuedꢅ
ꢅommand ꢀata
ꢆames
Oꢁeration Tꢃꢁe
Header
ꢅRꢅ
Action
Tꢃꢁe
Setting ꢅode
ꢅOLOR TEMP GAIꢆ G
Get
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢗꢌ ꢋꢓ
ꢐꢎ ꢋꢓ
ꢅꢗ ꢋꢕ
ꢖꢅ ꢋꢕ
EA ꢋꢕ
ꢍꢊ ꢋꢓ
ꢌꢓ ꢋꢕ
ꢎꢏ ꢋꢕ
ꢊꢍ ꢋꢓ
ꢓꢌ ꢋꢕ
ꢏꢎ ꢋꢕ
ꢋꢗ ꢋꢓ
ꢊꢅ ꢋꢓ
ꢀA ꢋꢓ
ꢌꢊ ꢋꢕ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢊꢏ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢏ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢏ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢍ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢍ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢍ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢎ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢎ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢎ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢗ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢗ ꢍꢌ
ꢊꢗ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
Increment
ꢀecrement
Get
ꢅOLOR TEMP GAIꢆ ꢊ
Increment
ꢀecrement
Get
ꢅOLOR TEMP
OꢋꢋSET R
Increment
ꢀecrement
Get
ꢅOLOR TEMP
OꢋꢋSET G
Increment
ꢀecrement
Get
ꢅOLOR TEMP
OꢋꢋSET ꢊ
Increment
ꢀecrement
ꢅOLOR
Get
Increment
ꢀecrement
Eꢒecꢈte
Get
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢊꢕ ꢗꢏ
ꢀꢍ ꢗꢏ
ꢌꢏ ꢗꢍ
ꢖꢌ ꢀꢌ
ꢓꢑ ꢗꢍ
ꢏꢋ ꢗꢍ
ꢋE ꢗꢏ
ꢗꢅ ꢀꢐ
ꢋꢐ ꢗꢏ
ꢑꢗ ꢗꢏ
ꢓꢎ ꢗꢍ
ꢅꢓ ꢀꢌ
ꢓA ꢗꢏ
ꢀA ꢗꢍ
ꢏA ꢗꢍ
ꢗꢑ ꢗꢏ
ꢏꢎ ꢗꢏ
ꢀꢎ ꢗꢏ
ꢓꢎ ꢗꢍ
ꢖꢕ ꢗꢍ
ꢌE ꢀꢗ
ꢑE ꢀꢎ
ꢎE ꢀꢎ
ꢋE ꢀꢗ
ꢋꢏ ꢀꢎ
ꢎꢏ ꢀꢗ
ꢑꢏ ꢀꢗ
ꢌꢏ ꢀꢎ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢏ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢏ ꢏꢏ
ꢌA ꢗꢌ
ꢌꢍ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢍ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢍ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢊ ꢗꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢐ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢐ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢑ ꢗꢌ
ꢌꢗ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢗ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢗ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢗ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢎ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢎ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢎ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢎ ꢏꢏ
ꢐꢓ ꢏꢌ
ꢐꢓ ꢏꢌ
ꢐꢓ ꢏꢌ
ꢐꢓ ꢏꢌ
ꢐꢕ ꢏꢌ
ꢐꢕ ꢏꢌ
ꢐꢕ ꢏꢌ
ꢐꢕ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢍ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢍ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢍ ꢌꢌ
ꢅOLOR Reset
TIꢆT
Increment
ꢀecrement
Eꢒecꢈte
Get
TIꢆT Reset
SHARPꢆESS
Increment
ꢀecrement
Eꢒecꢈte
TURꢆ Oꢋꢋ
TV
SHARPꢆESS Reset
PROGRESSIVE
Set
Set
ꢋILM
Get
VIꢀEO ꢆR
LOꢚ
MIꢀꢀLE
HIGH
Get
Mꢘ MEMORꢘ Load Set
Mꢘ MEMORꢘ Saꢄe Set
ꢐ
ꢏ
ꢍ
ꢓ
ꢐ
ꢏ
ꢍ
ꢓ
ꢀꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication ꢄcontinuedꢅ
ꢅommand ꢀata
ꢆames
Oꢁeration Tꢃꢁe
Header
ꢅRꢅ
Action
Tꢃꢁe
Setting ꢅode
Set
ꢓꢜꢍ
ꢐꢎꢜꢑ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢑE ꢀꢌ
ꢌE ꢀꢐ
ꢅE ꢀꢎ
ꢋE ꢀꢐ
ꢕE ꢀꢀ
Aꢀ ꢀꢌ
ꢑꢐ ꢗꢌ
ꢋꢗ ꢗꢌ
ꢏꢎ ꢗꢐ
Eꢅ ꢀꢑ
ꢌꢀ ꢖꢍ
ꢎꢊ ꢖꢍ
ꢊA ꢖꢏ
Eꢌ ꢀꢏ
ꢋꢐ ꢖꢏ
ꢑꢗ ꢖꢏ
ꢓꢎ ꢖꢍ
ꢐꢅ ꢀꢍ
ꢓꢑ ꢖꢍ
ꢏꢋ ꢖꢍ
ꢋE ꢖꢏ
ꢊꢕ ꢖꢏ
ꢀꢍ ꢖꢏ
ꢌꢏ ꢖꢍ
ꢎꢖ ꢀꢏ
ꢑꢐ ꢀꢌ
ꢌE ꢗꢏ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢖ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢖ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢖ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢑ ꢌꢌ
ASPEꢅT
ꢐꢓꢜꢑ
SMALL
ꢆORMAL
Get
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢖ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢖ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢖ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢑ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢑ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢑ ꢏꢏ
ꢏꢗ ꢗꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢏꢐ
ꢌꢌ ꢏꢐ
ꢌꢌ ꢏꢐ
ꢌꢏ ꢗꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢏꢐ
ꢌꢐ ꢏꢐ
ꢌꢐ ꢏꢐ
ꢌꢍ ꢗꢌ
ꢌꢍ ꢏꢐ
ꢌꢍ ꢏꢐ
ꢌꢍ ꢏꢐ
ꢌꢏ ꢏꢐ
ꢌꢏ ꢏꢐ
ꢌꢏ ꢏꢐ
ꢌꢓ ꢗꢌ
ꢌA ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢓ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢓ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢓ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢓ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢓ ꢏꢏ
ꢐꢗ ꢏꢌ
ꢐꢗ ꢏꢌ
ꢐꢗ ꢏꢌ
ꢐꢐ ꢏꢏ
ꢐꢐ ꢏꢏ
ꢐꢐ ꢏꢏ
ꢐꢐ ꢏꢏ
ꢐꢐ ꢏꢏ
ꢐꢐ ꢏꢏ
ꢐꢐ ꢏꢏ
ꢐꢐ ꢏꢏ
ꢐꢏ ꢏꢏ
ꢐꢏ ꢏꢏ
ꢐꢏ ꢏꢏ
ꢐꢏ ꢏꢏ
ꢐꢏ ꢏꢏ
ꢐꢏ ꢏꢏ
ꢐꢏ ꢏꢏ
ꢐꢏ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢍ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌA ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢑ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢖ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢗ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌA ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢑ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢖ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢗ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
Get
OVER SꢅAꢆ
Increment
ꢀecrement
Eꢒecꢈte
Get
OVER SꢅAꢆ Reset
V POSITIOꢆ
Increment
ꢀecrement
Eꢒecꢈte
Get
V POSITIOꢆ Reset
H POSITIOꢆ
Increment
ꢀecrement
Eꢒecꢈte
Get
H POSITIOꢆ Reset
H PHASE
Increment
ꢀecrement
Get
H SIꢝE
Increment
ꢀecrement
Eꢒecꢈte
Eꢒecꢈte
AUTO
H SIꢝE Reset
AUTO AꢀꢞUST
ꢅOLOR SPAꢅE
Set
RGꢊ
ꢑE ꢗꢍ
ꢎE ꢗꢍ
ꢋE ꢗꢏ
ꢅE ꢗꢌ
ꢍꢀ ꢗꢏ
ꢓA ꢀꢗ
ꢀA ꢀꢎ
ꢗꢑ ꢀꢗ
Aꢏ ꢗꢌ
ꢅꢏ ꢗꢓ
ꢕꢏ ꢗꢕ
ꢕꢏ ꢗꢌ
ꢎꢏ ꢗꢗ
ꢅꢏ ꢗꢐ
ꢍꢏ ꢗꢓ
ꢍꢐ ꢗꢎ
Eꢎ ꢗꢌ
ꢖꢎ ꢗꢓ
ꢐꢎ ꢗꢕ
ꢐꢎ ꢗꢌ
ꢏꢎ ꢗꢗ
ꢖꢎ ꢗꢐ
ꢗꢎ ꢗꢓ
ꢗꢕ ꢗꢎ
SMPTEꢏꢓꢌ
REꢅꢗꢌꢑ
REꢅꢎꢌꢐ
Get
Set
Set
ꢅOMPOꢆEꢆT
SꢅART RGꢊ
Get
ꢅOMPOꢆEꢆT
AUTO
ꢅꢔVIꢀEO ꢋORMAT
ꢆTSꢅ
PAL
SEꢅAM
ꢆTSꢅꢓꢟꢓꢍ
MꢔPAL
ꢆꢔPAL
Get
Set
AUTO
SꢔVIꢀEO ꢋORMAT
ꢆTSꢅ
PAL
SEꢅAM
ꢆTSꢅꢓꢟꢓꢍ
MꢔPAL
ꢆꢔPAL
Get
ꢀꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication ꢄcontinuedꢅ
ꢅommand ꢀata
ꢆames
Oꢁeration Tꢃꢁe
Header
ꢅRꢅ
Action
Tꢃꢁe
Setting ꢅode
ꢋRAME LOꢅꢙ
Set
TURꢆ Oꢋꢋ
TURꢆ Oꢆ
Get
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢅꢊ ꢀꢎ
ꢕꢊ ꢀꢗ
ꢋꢖ ꢀꢎ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢓ ꢍꢌ
ꢐꢓ ꢍꢌ
ꢐꢓ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
RGꢊꢐ Iꢆꢔꢐ
RGꢊ Iꢆꢔꢏ
Set
Set
Sꢘꢆꢅ Oꢆ G Oꢋꢋ
Sꢘꢆꢅ Oꢆ G Oꢆ
Get
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢕE ꢀꢗ
ꢅE ꢀꢎ
ꢌꢀ ꢀꢎ
Aꢏ ꢀꢎ
ꢍꢏ ꢀꢗ
ꢋꢐ ꢀꢗ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢌ ꢏꢌ
ꢐꢌ ꢏꢌ
ꢐꢌ ꢏꢌ
ꢐꢐ ꢏꢌ
ꢐꢐ ꢏꢌ
ꢐꢐ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢍ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢍ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
Sꢘꢆꢅ Oꢆ G Oꢋꢋ
Sꢘꢆꢅ Oꢆ G Oꢆ
Get
ꢙEꢘSTOꢆE V
Get
Increment
ꢀecrement
Eꢒecꢈte
ꢆORMAL
ꢚHISPER
Get
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢊꢑ ꢀꢍ
ꢀꢋ ꢀꢍ
ꢌE ꢀꢏ
ꢌꢖ ꢀꢌ
ꢍꢊ ꢏꢍ
Aꢊ ꢏꢏ
ꢌꢖ ꢏꢍ
ꢅꢗ ꢀꢏ
ꢕꢗ ꢀꢍ
Aꢗ ꢀꢍ
ꢍꢗ ꢀꢏ
ꢋꢓ ꢀꢏ
ꢋE ꢀꢀ
ꢎE ꢀꢅ
ꢑE ꢀꢅ
ꢌE ꢀꢀ
ꢅꢀ ꢀꢀ
ꢅE ꢀꢅ
ꢕE ꢀꢀ
AE ꢀꢀ
ꢍE ꢀꢅ
ꢋꢀ ꢀꢅ
ꢌꢏ ꢀꢅ
ꢑꢏ ꢀꢀ
ꢎꢏ ꢀꢀ
ꢋꢏ ꢀꢅ
ꢍꢐ ꢀꢅ
ꢓꢎ ꢀꢅ
ꢀꢎ ꢀꢀ
ꢏꢎ ꢀꢀ
ꢊꢎ ꢀꢅ
ꢗꢕ ꢀꢅ
ꢍꢏ ꢀꢀ
Aꢏ ꢀꢅ
ꢕꢏ ꢀꢅ
ꢅꢏ ꢀꢀ
ꢌꢐ ꢀꢀ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢗ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢗ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢗ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢅ ꢗꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢍ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢍ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢍ
ꢌꢐ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢍꢌ
ꢍꢌ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢌ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢌ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢌ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢌ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢓ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢓ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢓ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢓ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢓ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢐ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢐ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢐ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢐ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢐ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢏ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢏ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢏ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢏ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢏ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢕ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢕ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢕ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢕ ꢏꢌ
ꢍꢕ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢍ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢍ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢍ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢍ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢍ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢍ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢙEꢘSTOꢆE V Reset
ꢚHISPER
Set
Set
MIRROR
ꢆORMAL
HꢜIꢆVERT
VꢜIꢆVERT
HꢠVꢜIꢆVERT
Get
AUꢀIO ꢔ RGꢊꢐ
AUꢀIO ꢔ RGꢊꢏ
AUꢀIO ꢔ Video
AUꢀIO ꢔ SꢔVideo
Set
Set
Set
Set
TURꢆ Oꢋꢋ
Aꢈdioꢐ
Aꢈdioꢏ
Aꢈdioꢍ
Get
TURꢆ Oꢋꢋ
Aꢈdioꢐ
Aꢈdioꢏ
Aꢈdioꢍ
Get
TURꢆ Oꢋꢋ
Aꢈdioꢐ
Aꢈdioꢏ
Aꢈdioꢍ
Get
TURꢆ Oꢋꢋ
Aꢈdioꢐ
Aꢈdioꢏ
Aꢈdioꢍ
Get
AUꢀIO ꢔ ꢅomꢁonent Set
TURꢆ Oꢋꢋ
Aꢈdioꢐ
Aꢈdioꢏ
Aꢈdioꢍ
Get
ꢀ3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication ꢄcontinuedꢅ
ꢅommand ꢀata
ꢆames
MUTE
Oꢁeration Tꢃꢁe
Header
ꢅRꢅ
Action
Tꢃꢁe
Setting ꢅode
Set
Set
TURꢆ Oꢋꢋ
TURꢆ Oꢆ
Get
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢓꢎ ꢀꢍ
ꢀꢎ ꢀꢏ
ꢗꢕ ꢀꢍ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
LAꢆGUAGE
EꢆGLISH
ꢋRAꢆꢡAIS
ꢀEUTSꢅH
ESPAꢢOL
ITALIAꢆO
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢋꢗ ꢀꢍ
ꢎꢗ ꢀꢏ
ꢑꢗ ꢀꢏ
ꢌꢗ ꢀꢍ
ꢍꢗ ꢀꢐ
Aꢗ ꢀꢌ
ꢕꢗ ꢀꢌ
ꢅꢗ ꢀꢐ
ꢍꢗ ꢀꢓ
Aꢗ ꢀꢕ
ꢍꢗ ꢀE
ꢕꢗ ꢀꢕ
ꢅꢗ ꢀꢓ
ꢋꢗ ꢀꢎ
ꢎꢗ ꢀꢗ
ꢑꢗ ꢀꢗ
ꢌꢗ ꢀꢎ
ꢅꢓ ꢀꢍ
ꢌꢓ ꢀꢗ
ꢎꢏ ꢀꢗ
ꢊꢍ ꢀꢎ
ꢀꢅ ꢅꢎ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢐꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢐꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢐꢕ ꢍꢌ
ꢓꢍ ꢗꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢍ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢗ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢖ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢑ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌA ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢊ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢅ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢀ ꢌꢌ
ꢌE ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢋ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢆORSꢙ
ꢆEꢀERLAꢆꢀS
PORTUGUꢣS
SVEꢆSꢙA
PУCCKИЙ
SUOMI
POLSꢙI
TꢤRꢙꢡE
Get
MEꢆU POSITIOꢆ H
Get
Increment
ꢀecrement
Eꢒecꢈte
MEꢆU POSITIOꢆ H
Reset
MEꢆU POSITIOꢆ V
Get
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢓꢌ ꢀꢗ
ꢏꢎ ꢀꢗ
ꢋꢗ ꢀꢎ
Aꢖ ꢅꢗ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢎ ꢍꢌ
ꢐꢎ ꢍꢌ
ꢐꢎ ꢍꢌ
ꢓꢓ ꢗꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
Increment
ꢀecrement
Eꢒecꢈte
MEꢆU POSITIOꢆ V
Reset
ꢀ4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication ꢄcontinuedꢅ
ꢅommand ꢀata
ꢆames
Oꢁeration Tꢃꢁe
Header
ꢅRꢅ
Action
Tꢃꢁe
Setting ꢅode
ꢊLAꢆꢙ
Set
Mꢃ Screen
ORIGIꢆAL
ꢊLUE
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢋꢊ ꢅA
ꢋꢊ Eꢏ
ꢅꢊ ꢀꢍ
ꢎꢊ ꢀꢌ
ꢑꢊ ꢀꢌ
ꢌꢖ ꢀꢍ
ꢋꢊ ꢀꢖ
ꢎꢊ ꢀꢑ
ꢅꢖ ꢀꢖ
ꢅꢊ ꢅꢊ
ꢌꢊ ꢀꢏ
ꢑꢊ ꢀꢍ
ꢍꢖ ꢀꢏ
ꢍꢊ Eꢋ
Aꢊ EE
ꢌꢖ Eꢋ
ꢖꢋ ꢀꢎ
ꢐꢋ ꢀꢗ
ꢊꢅ ꢀꢎ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢏꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢏꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢏꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢍꢌ
ꢅꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢅꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢅꢌ ꢍꢌ
ꢐꢗ ꢍꢌ
ꢐꢗ ꢍꢌ
ꢐꢗ ꢍꢌ
ꢏꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢓꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢍ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢏꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢚHITE
ꢊLAꢅꢙ
Get
ꢊLAꢆꢙ OnꢥOꢉꢉ
START UP
Set
Set
TURꢆ Oꢋꢋ
TURꢆ Oꢆ
Get
Mꢃ Screen
ORIGIꢆAL
TURꢆ Oꢋꢋ
Get
Mꢃ Screen LOꢅꢙ
MESSAGE
Set
Set
TURꢆ Oꢋꢋ
TURꢆ Oꢆ
Get
TURꢆ Oꢋꢋ
TURꢆ Oꢆ
Get
AUTO SEARꢅH
AUTO Oꢆ
Set
Set
TURꢆ Oꢋꢋ
TURꢆ Oꢆ
Get
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢊꢎ ꢀꢎ
ꢏꢎ ꢀꢗ
ꢖꢕ ꢀꢎ
ꢍꢊ ꢖꢑ
Aꢊ ꢖꢖ
ꢌꢖ ꢖꢑ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢎ ꢏꢌ
ꢐꢎ ꢏꢌ
ꢐꢎ ꢏꢌ
ꢏꢌ ꢍꢐ
ꢏꢌ ꢍꢐ
ꢏꢌ ꢍꢐ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
TURꢆ Oꢋꢋ
TURꢆ Oꢆ
Get
AUTO ꢙEꢘSTOꢆE
EꢦEꢅUTE
Eꢒecꢈte
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
Eꢕ ꢀꢐ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢀ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
AUTO ꢙEꢘSTOꢆE Set
TURꢆ Oꢋꢋ
TURꢆ Oꢆ
Get
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
EA ꢀꢐ
ꢗA ꢀꢌ
ꢀꢑ ꢀꢐ
ꢌꢖ ꢖꢎ
ꢎE ꢖꢎ
ꢊꢋ ꢖꢗ
ꢅꢏ ꢋꢋ
ꢕꢖ ꢀꢅ
ꢅꢏ ꢋꢌ
ꢑꢖ ꢅꢎ
ꢗꢅ ꢀꢏ
ꢐA ꢀꢏ
ꢅꢊ ꢀꢍ
ꢖꢍ ꢀꢏ
ꢐꢍ ꢀꢍ
ꢊꢌ ꢀꢏ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢋ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢋ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢋ ꢏꢌ
ꢐꢌ ꢍꢐ
ꢐꢌ ꢍꢐ
ꢐꢌ ꢍꢐ
ꢑꢌ ꢐꢌ
ꢍꢌ ꢗꢌ
Aꢌ ꢐꢌ
ꢓꢌ ꢗꢌ
ꢌꢗ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢗ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢗ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢍꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
AUTO Oꢋꢋ
Get
Increment
ꢀecrement
Get
LAMP TIME
LAMP TIME Reset
ꢋILTER TIME
Eꢒecꢈte
Get
ꢋILER TIME Reset
MAGꢆIꢋꢘ
Eꢒecꢈte
Get
Increment
ꢀecrement
ꢆORMAL
ꢋREEꢝE
Get
ꢋREEꢝE
Set
ꢀ5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication ꢄcontinuedꢅ
ꢅommand ꢀata
ꢆames
Oꢁeration Tꢃꢁe
Header
ꢅRꢅ
Action
Tꢃꢁe
Setting ꢅode
REMOTE ꢋREꢧ
ꢆORMAL
Set
ꢀisabꢂe
Enabꢂe
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢋꢋ ꢍꢀ
ꢎꢋ ꢍꢅ
ꢅꢅ ꢍꢀ
ꢌꢍ ꢍꢅ
ꢑꢍ ꢍꢀ
ꢍꢌ ꢍꢅ
ꢍA ꢍꢍ
ꢋA ꢍꢐ
ꢎA ꢍꢌ
ꢕA ꢍꢏ
AA ꢍꢏ
ꢋA ꢍE
ꢎA ꢍꢋ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢍꢌ ꢏꢎ
ꢍꢌ ꢏꢎ
ꢍꢌ ꢏꢎ
ꢍꢐ ꢏꢎ
ꢍꢐ ꢏꢎ
ꢍꢐ ꢏꢎ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢐ ꢌꢌ
Get
REMOTE ꢋREꢧ HIGH Set
ꢀisabꢂe
Enabꢂe
Get
Mꢘ ꢊUTTOꢆꢔꢐ
Set
RGꢊꢐ
RGꢊꢏ
ꢅOMPOꢆEꢆT
SꢔVIꢀEO
Video
IꢆꢋORMATIOꢆ
AUTO ꢙEꢘSTOꢆE
EꢦEꢅUTE
Mꢘ MEMORꢘ
PIꢅTURE MOꢀE
ꢋILTER RESET
eꢔSHOT
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢑA ꢍꢋ
ꢌA ꢍE
ꢍA ꢍꢅ
ꢕA ꢍꢀ
ꢅA ꢍꢅ
ꢍA ꢍꢑ
ꢌꢑ ꢍꢍ
ꢅꢎ ꢍꢏ
ꢌꢎ ꢍꢌ
ꢑꢎ ꢍꢐ
Aꢎ ꢍꢍ
ꢕꢎ ꢍꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢍꢋ
ꢑꢎ ꢍE
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢌ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢐ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢐ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢐ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢐ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢐ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢐ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢐ ꢍꢎ
ꢐꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢍ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢗ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢖ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢐ ꢌꢌ
VOLUMEꢨ
VOLUMEꢔ
Get
Mꢘ ꢊUTTOꢆꢔꢏ
Set
RGꢊꢐ
RGꢊꢏ
ꢅOMPOꢆEꢆT
SꢔVIꢀEO
Video
IꢆꢋORMATIOꢆ
AUTO ꢙEꢘSTOꢆE
EꢦEꢅUTE
Mꢘ MEMORꢘ
PIꢅTURE MOꢀE
ꢋILTER RESET
eꢔSHOT
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢎꢎ ꢍE
ꢋꢎ ꢍꢋ
ꢅꢎ ꢍꢀ
Aꢎ ꢍꢅ
ꢍꢎ ꢍꢀ
ꢅꢎ ꢍꢖ
ꢋꢕ ꢍꢏ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢐ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢐ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢐ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢐ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢐ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢐ ꢍꢎ
ꢌꢐ ꢍꢎ
ꢐꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢍ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢗ ꢌꢌ
ꢐꢖ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
VOLUMEꢨ
VOLUMEꢔ
Get
ꢀ6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication ꢄcontinuedꢅ
ꢅommand ꢀata
ꢆames
Oꢁeration Tꢃꢁe
Header
ꢅRꢅ
Action
Tꢃꢁe
Setting ꢅode
VOLUMEꢔRGꢊꢐ
Get
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢊE Eꢋ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢍ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢎ ꢌꢌ
ꢅꢀ ꢅꢅ
Aꢊ ꢅꢅ
ꢗA ꢅꢀ
ꢋꢀ ꢅꢀ
ꢑꢊ ꢅꢀ
ꢓA ꢅꢅ
ꢍꢐ ꢅꢀ
ꢕꢗ ꢅꢀ
ꢖꢎ ꢅꢅ
ꢗꢕ ꢅꢀ
ꢐꢍ ꢅꢀ
ꢅꢏ ꢅꢅ
ꢌꢐ ꢅꢅ
ꢎꢗ ꢅꢅ
ꢊꢎ ꢅꢀ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
ꢎꢌ ꢏꢌ
ꢎꢌ ꢏꢌ
ꢎꢌ ꢏꢌ
ꢎꢓ ꢏꢌ
ꢎꢓ ꢏꢌ
ꢎꢓ ꢏꢌ
ꢎꢐ ꢏꢌ
ꢎꢐ ꢏꢌ
ꢎꢐ ꢏꢌ
ꢎꢏ ꢏꢌ
ꢎꢏ ꢏꢌ
ꢎꢏ ꢏꢌ
ꢎꢕ ꢏꢌ
ꢎꢕ ꢏꢌ
ꢎꢕ ꢏꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢌ ꢌꢌ
Increment
ꢀecrement
Get
VOLUMEꢔRGꢊꢏ
VOLUMEꢔVideo
Increment
ꢀecrement
Get
Increment
ꢀecrement
Get
VOLUMEꢔSꢔVideo
VOLUMEꢔꢅomꢁonent
Increment
ꢀecrement
Get
ꢌꢏ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢓ ꢌꢌ
ꢌꢕ ꢌꢌ
Increment
ꢀecrement
ꢀ7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P8r7oje5c5toEr -RJ/8776-RJ Only
Userꢆs Manual – Network Functions
This manual is only intended to explain Network Functions.
WARNING • Before using the network functions, read the User’s Manual
carefully to ensure your projector is set up correctly.
• After reading, keep the manuals in a safe place for future reference.
NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in
this manual.
• The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not
permitted without express written consent.
Trademark acknowledgment
• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
• Netscape is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation.
• JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.
Contents
Network Functions ..................................................................2
Settings ...................................................................................6
Projector Control ...................................................................22
Failure ꢇ Warning Alerts via E-mail......................................26
Projector Management via SNMP..........................................28
Controlling the Projector via Scheduling..............................29
e-Shot ꢄStill Image Transferꢅ ꢁisplay ....................................32
Command Control via the Network.......................................34
ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Functions
Network Functions
RJ Only.
This projector is equipped with the following network functions.
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser
You can change the settings of or control the projector via a network by using a
web browser from a PC that is connected to the same network.
(4)
Failure ꢇ Warning Alerts via E-mail
The projector can automatically send an alert to specified e-mail addresses when
the projector requires maintenance or has encountered an error.
(26)
Projector Management via SNMP
This projector is SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) compliant,
allowing you to monitor it from a remote location using SNMP software. In
addition, the projector is able to send failure & warning alerts to a specified PC.
(28)
Controlling the Projector via Scheduling
You can schedule the projector to perform various functions according to the
DATE and TIME.
(29)
Still Image Transfer
The projector can display still images that are transferred via the network.
(32)
Projector Control via RS-232C via the Network
The projector can be controlled using RS-232C commands over a network.
(34)
ꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Functions
Before using the network functions…
To use the network functions of this projector, the projector must be configured to
suit your network. Consult with your network administrator before connecting the
projector to your network. Incorrect network configuration of this projector may
cause problems on your network.
Connect to the Gateway (The router/PC that forwards traffic to a destination
outside of the subnet of the transmitting device) from the network terminal on the
projector using a CAT-5 cable and configure the following settings.
If using a network with DHCP enabled:
The projector’s network settings can be configured automatically. when [DHCP]
on the network menu is set to [TURN ON]. Please refer to DHCP in network
If a fixed / static IP address is required, please configure your projector
menu.
according to the steps in the following section.
If using a network system that does not have DHCP enabled or if
using a fixed IP address on a network system equipped with DHCP
enabled:
Configure the following settings on the network menu.
ꢀ. [DHCP]: Disable DHCP (Set [DHCP] to [TURN OFF]).
[IP ADDRESS]: Enter an appropriate IP address for the projector to connect
to your network.
ꢁ.
[SUBNET MASK]: Enter an appropriate SUBNETMASK for the projector to
connect to your network.
3.
[DEFAULT GATEWAY]: Enter an appropriate Gateway (the router/PC that
forwards traffic to a destination outside of the subnet of the transmitting
device) address for the projector to connect to your network.
4.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Functions
Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser
You can adjust or control the projector via a network from a web browser on a PC
that is connected to the same network.
NOTE • Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher or Netscape 6.2 or higher are required.
• If JavaScript is disabled in your web browser configuration, you must enable
JavaScript in order to use the projector web pages properly. See the Help files
for your web browser for details on how to enable JavaScript.
• This projector is SSL (Secure Socket Layer) compliant. Please specify “https://”
when the entering the projector address.
• If no operations are performed via a web browser for approx. 50 seconds the
system will automatically log off. Please Re-log on to continue operations via a
web browser.
• After you logon, a small, blank window will appear behind the main operation
window. Please do not close this small, blank window. If this window is closed,
the system will automatically log off after certain period of time even if an
operation is being performed.
The small, blank window will close when the main operation window is closed.
• The small, blank window may be considered a pop-up and be blocked if you
are using Windows XP Service Pack ꢁ, or using other security software.
If Service Pack ꢁ blocks the window the following message will appear:
"Pop-up blocked. To see this pop-up or additional options click here..."
Please select "Temporarily Allow Pop-ups" or "Always Allow Pop-ups From This
Site..." to allow the window to open.
• It is recommended that all web browser updates be installed. It is especially
recommended that all users running Internet Explorer on a Microsoft Windows
version prior to Windows XP Service Pack 2 install security update Q832894
(MS04-004) or the web browser interface may not be displayed correctly.
And when using an older version of Internet Explorer, during operations the
browser will log out after 50 seconds.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Functions
Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
When configuring or controlling the projector via a web browser, an ID and
password are required. There are two types of IDs, Administrator IDs and User
IDs. The following chart describes the differences between user and administrator
IDs.
Item
Description
Administrator ID User ID
Displays the projector’s current
network configuration settings.
Network Information
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Displays and configures network
settings.
Network Settings
Port Settings
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Displays and configures
communication port settings.
Displays and configures e-mail
addressing settings.
Mail Settings
Displays and configures failure &
warning alerts.
Alert Settings
Displays and configures schedule
settings.
Schedule Settings
Date/Time Settings
Displays and configures the date and
time settings.
Displays and configures passwords
and other security settings.
Security Settings
Projector Control
Projector Status
√
√
√
N/A
√
Controls the projector.
Displays and configures the current
projector status.
√
Restarts the projector’s network
connection.
Network Restart
√
N/A
Below are the factory default settings for administrator IDs, user IDs and
passwords.
Item
Administrator ID
User ID
ID
Password
ꢄblankꢅ
Administrator
User
ꢄblankꢅ
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings
Settings
Refer to the following for configuring or controlling the projector via a web browser.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
Fig. ꢀ
ꢀ) Enter
[https://1ꢀ2.1ꢁꢂ.1.10] into the
address bar of the web browser and
the screen in Fig. ꢀ will be displayed.
ꢁ) Enter your ID and password and click
[Logon].
If the logon is successful either the Fig.2 or Fig.3 screen will be displayed.
Fig. ꢁ (Logon with administrator ID)
Fig. 3 (Logon with user ID)
3) Click the desired operation or configuration item on the main menu located on
the left-hand side of the screen (Fig. 2 or Fig. 3).
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings
Network Information
All screen images displayed in this manual are
screens of a logon using an administrator ID.
Any administrator only functions will not be
displayed when using a user ID. Refer to the
descriptions in each table.
Displays the projector’s current network configuration settings.
Item
Description
Displays the DHCP configuration settings.
Displays the current IP address.
Displays the Subnet Mask.
DHCP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
MAC Address
Displays the Default Gateway.
Displays the MAC address.
Displays the network firmware time stamp. This information is only
displayed when logged on using an administrator ID.
Firmware Date
Displays the network firmware version number. This information is
only displayed when logged on using an administrator ID.
Firmware Version
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings
Network Settings
Displays and configures network settings.
Item
Description
Configures network settings.
IP Configuration
DHCP ON
Enables DHCP.
Disables DHCP.
DHCP OFF
IP Address
Configures the IP address when DHCP is disabled.
Configures the Subnet Mask when DHCP is disabled.
Configures the Default Gateway when DHCP is disabled.
Configures the Projector name.
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Projector Name
SysLocation
Configures the location to be referred to when using SNMP.
Configures the contact information to be referred to when
using SNMP.
SysContact
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the
network connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must
restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by
clicking [Network Restart] on the main menu.
• If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network
administrator before setting server addresses.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings
Port Settings
Displays and configures communication port settings.
Item
Description
Network Control Port1
(Port:23)
Configures command control port 1 (Port:23).
Port open
Click the [Enable] check box to use port 23.
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required
for this port.
Authentication
Network Control Port2
(Port:9715)
Configures command control port 2 (Port:9715).
Port open
Click the [Enable] check box to use port 9715.
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required
for this port.
Authentication
Image Transfer Port
(Port:9716)
Configures the image transfer port (Port:9716).
Port open
Click the [Enable] check box to use port 9716.
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required
for this port.
Authentication
SNMP Port
Port open
Configures the SNMP port.
Click the [Enable] check box to use SNMP.
Configures the destination of the SNMP Trap in IP format.
Configures the SMTP port.
Trap address
SMTP Port
Port open
Click the [Enable] check box to use the e-mail function.
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the
network connection. The network connection must be restarted when the
configuration settings are changed. The network connection can be restarted
using [Network Restart] on the main menu.dresses.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings
Mail Settings
Displays and configures e-mail addressing settings.
Item
Description
Click the [Enable] check box to use the e-mail function.
Configure the conditions for sending email under [Alert
Settings].
Send Mail
SMTP Server IP Address Configures the address of the mail server in IP format.
Configures the sender e-mail address.
The length of the sender e-mail address can be up to 255
Sender E-mail address
alphanumeric characters.
Configures the e-mail address of up to five recipients. You
can also specify [TO] or [CC] for each address. The length of
the recipient e-mail address can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Recipient E-mail address
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • You can confirm whether the mail settings work correctly using the
[Send Test Mail] button.
• If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network
administrator before setting server addresses.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings
Alert Settings
Displays and configures failure & warning alerts.
Item
Description
Configures Cover Error alert settings.
Cover Error
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Send Mail
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Text
Fan Error
Configures Fan Error alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Send Mail
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Configures the text of the e- mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Text
ꢀꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings
Alert Settings (Continued)
Item
Description
Lamp Error
Configures Lamp Error alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Send Mail
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Text
Temp Error
Configures Temp Error alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Send Mail
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Mail Text
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
Air Flow Error
SNMP Trap
Configures Air Flow Error alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Send Mail
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Text
ꢀꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings
Alert Settings (Continued)
Item
Description
Configures Lamp Time Error alert settings.
Lamp Time Error
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Send Mail
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Text
Cool Error
SNMP Trap
Configures Cool Error alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Send Mail
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Text
Filter Error
SNMP Trap
Configures Filter Error alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Send Mail
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Text
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings
Alert Settings (Continued)
Item
Description
Other Error
Configures Other Error alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Send Mail
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Text
Schedule Execution Error Configures Schedule Execution Error alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Send Mail
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Mail Text
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
Lamp Time Alarm
Alarm Time
Configures Lamp Time Alarm alert settings.
Configures the lamp time to alert.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Send Mail
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Mail Text
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
ꢀ4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings
Alert Settings (Continued)
Item
Description
Filter Time Alarm
Alarm Time
Configures Filter Time Alarm alert settings.
Configures the filter time to alert.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Send Mail
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Mail Text
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric characters.
Transition Detector Alarm Configures Transition Detector Alarm alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Send Mail
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Mail Text
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric characters.
“CHANGE THE LAMP” is Configures alert settings for when “CHANGE THE LAMP” is
displayed
displayed.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Send Mail
Mail Subject
Mail Text
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric characters.
Cold Start
Configures Cold Start alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Authentication Failure
SNMP Trap
Configures Authentication Failure alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings
Schedule Settings
Displays and configures schedule settings.
Item
Description
Daily
Schedule
Schedule List
Sunday
Configures the daily schedule.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable daily scheduling.
Displays the current daily schedule.
Configures the Sunday schedule.
Schedule
Click the [Enable] check box to enable Sunday scheduling.
Displays the current Sunday schedule.
Schedule List
Monday
Configures the Monday schedule.
Schedule
Click the [Enable] check box to enable Monday scheduling.
Displays the current Monday schedule.
Schedule List
Tuesday
Configures the Tuesday schedule.
Schedule
Click the [Enable] check box to enable Tuesday scheduling.
Displays the current Tuesday schedule.
Schedule List
Wednesday
Configures the Wednesday schedule.
Schedule
Click the [Enable] check box to enable Wednesday scheduling.
Displays the current Wednesday schedule.
Configures the Thursday schedule.
Schedule List
Thursday
Schedule
Click the [Enable] check box to enable Thursday scheduling.
Displays the current Thursday schedule.
Schedule List
Friday
Configures the Friday schedule.
Schedule
Click the [Enable] check box to enable Friday scheduling.
Displays the current Friday schedule.
Schedule List
Saturday
Configures the Saturday schedule.
Schedule
Click the [Enable] check box to enable Saturday scheduling.
Displays the current Saturday schedule.
Schedule List
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings
Schedule Setting (Continued)
Item
Description
Configures the specific date (No.1) schedule.
Specific date No1
Click the [Enable] check box to enable specific date (No.1)
scheduling.
Schedule
Month/Day
Schedule List
Configures the Month and date.
Displays the current specific date (No.1) schedule.
Configures the specific date (No.2) schedule.
Specific date No.2
Click the [Enable] check box to enable specific date (No.2)
scheduling.
Schedule
Month/Day
Schedule List
Configures the Month and date.
Displays the current specific date (No.2) schedule.
Configures the specific date (No.3) schedule.
Specific date No.3
Click the [Enable] check box to enable specific date (No.3)
scheduling.
Schedule
Month/Day
Schedule List
Configures the Month and date.
Displays the current specific date (No.3) schedule.
Configures the specific date (No.4) schedule.
Specific date No.4
Click the [Enable] check box to enable specific date (No.4)
scheduling.
Schedule
Month/Day
Schedule List
Configures the Month and date.
Displays the current specific date (No.4) schedule.
Configures the specific date (No.5) schedule.
Specific date No.5
Click the [Enable] check box to enable specific date (No.5)
scheduling.
Schedule
Month/Day
Set the Month and date.
Schedule List
Displays the current specific date (No.5) schedule.
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
ꢀ7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings
Schedule Setting (Continued)
To add additional functions and events click the [Add] button and set the following
items.
Item
Description
Time
Configures the time to execute commands.
Configures the commands to be executed.
Configures the parameters for power control.
Command
Power Parameter
Input Source
Parameter
Configures the parameters for input switching.
Display Image
Parameter
Configures the parameters for display of transfer image data.
Click the [Register] button to add new commands to the Schedule List.
Click the [Delete] button to delete commands from the Schedule list.
ꢁate/Time Settings
Displays and configures the date and time settings.
Item
Current Date
Description
Configures the current date in Year/Month/Day format.
Configures the current time in Hour:Minute:Second format.
Current Time
ꢀ8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings
Date/Time Settings (Continued)
Item
Description
Click the [ON] check box to enable daylight savings time and
set the following items.
Daylight Savings Time
Start
Configures the date and time daylight savings time begins.
Configures the month daylight savings time begins (1~12).
Month
Configures the week of the month daylight savings time
begins (First, 2, 3, 4, Last).
Week
Day
Configures the day of the week daylight savings time begins
(Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat).
Hour
Minute
End
Configures the hour daylight savings time begins (0 ~ 23).
Configures the minute daylight savings time begins (0 ~ 59).
Configures the date and time daylight savings time ends.
Configures the month daylight savings time ends (1 ~ 12).
Month
Configures the week of the month daylight savings time ends
(First, 2, 3, 4, Last).
Week
Day
Configures the day of the week daylight savings time ends
(Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat).
Hour
Configures the hour daylight savings time ends (0 ~ 23).
Configures the minute daylight savings time ends (0 ~ 59).
Minute
Configures the time difference (hours:minutes).
Set the same time difference as the one set on your PC. If
unsure, consult your network administrator.
Time difference
Click the [ON] check box to retrieve Date and Time
information from the SNTP server and set the following items.
SNTP
SNTP Server IP Address Configures the SNTP server address in IP format.
Configures the interval at which to retrieve Date and Time
information from the SNTP server. (hours:minutes).
Cycle
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection.
The network connection must be restarted when the configuration settings are changed, The
network connection can be restarted using [Network Restart] on the main menu.
• If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network
administrator before setting server addresses.
• To enable the SNTP function, the time difference must be set.
• The projector will retrieve DATE and TIME information from the Timeserver
and override time settings when SNTP is enabled.
• The Internal Clock’s time may not remain accurate. Using SNTP is
recommended to maintain accurate time.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings
Security Settings
Displays and configures passwords and other security settings.
Item
Description
Administrator authority Configures the Administrator ID and Password.
Configures the Administrator ID.
The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric
Administrator ID
characters.
Configures the Administrator Password.
The length of the text can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Administrator
Password
Re-enter Administrator
Password
Re-enter the above password for verification.
User authority
Configures the User ID and Password.
Configures the User ID.
The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric
characters.
User ID
Configures the User Password.
The length of the text can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
User Password
Re-enter User
Password
Used to re-enter the above password for verification.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings
Security Settings (Continued)
Item
Description
Configures the Authentication Password for the command
control.
Network Control
Configures the Authentication Password.
The length of the text can be up to 16 alphanumeric
characters.
Authentication
Password
Re-enter Authentication
Password
Used to re-enter the above password for verification.
Configures the community name if SNMP is used.
SNMP
Configures the community name.
The length of the text can be up to 64 alphanumeric
characters.
Community Name
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the
network connection. The network connection must be restarted when the
configuration settings are changed. The network connection can be restarted
using [Network Restart] on the main menu.
ꢁꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Projector Control
Projector Control
Projector Control
The items shown in the table below can be
performed using the [Projector Control] menu.
Select an item using the up and down arrow keys
on the PC.
Most of the items have a submenu.
Refer to the table below for details.
Controls the projector.
Item
Main
Description
Power
Turns the power On/Off.
Input Source
Picture Mode
Blank On/Off
Mute
Selects the input source.
Selects the Picture Mode setting.
Turns Blank On/Off.
Turns Mute On/Off.
Freeze
Selects the Freeze setting.
Controls the Magnify setting.
Magnify
Picture
Brightness
Contrast
Adjusts the Brightness setting.
Adjusts the Contrast setting.
Selects the Gamma setting.
Selects the Color Temp setting.
Adjusts the Color setting.
Gamma
Color Temp
Color
Tint
Adjusts the Tint setting.
Sharpness
MyMemory Recall
MyMemory Save
Adjusts the Sharpness setting.
Recalls the MyMemory data.
Saves the MyMemory data.
ꢀꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Projector Control
Projector Control (Continued)
Item
Description
Image
Aspect
Selects the Aspect setting.
Selects the Over Scan setting.
Over Scan
V Position
H Position
H Phase
Adjusts the V Position.
Adjusts the H Position.
Adjusts the H Phase.
Adjusts the H Size.
H Size
Auto Adjust
Performs Auto Adjustment.
Input
Progressive
Video NR
Selects the progressive setting.
Selects the Video NR setting.
Color Space
Component
C-Video Format
S-Video Format
Frame Lock
RGB in-1
Selects the Color Space.
Selects the Component terminal setting.
Selects the Video Format setting.
Selects the S-Video Format setting.
Enables/Disables Frame Lock.
Selects the RGBꢁ input signal type.
Selects the RGBꢀ input signal type.
RGB in-2
Setup
Aoto Keystone Execute Performs the Automatic keystone distortion correction.
Keystone
Adjusts the Keystone setting.
Whisper
Selects the Fan speed. (Normal or Whisper)
Selects the Mirror status.
Mirror
Volume
Adjusts the Volume setting.
Audio-RGB1
Audio-RGB2
Audio-Video
Audio-S-Video
Audio-Component
Assigns the Audio-RGB1 input terminal.
Assigns the Audio-RGB2 input terminal.
Assigns the Audio-Video input terminal.
Assigns the Audio-S-Video input terminal.
Assigns the Audio-Component input terminal.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Projector Control
Projector Control (Continued)
Item
Description
Screen
Language
Selects the Language for the OSD.
Adjusts the vertical Menu Position.
Adjusts the horizontal Menu Position.
Selects the Blank mode.
Menu Position V
Menu Position H
Blank
Startup
Selects the Startup screen mode.
Turns MyScreen Lock On/Off.
MyScreen Lock
Message
Turns the Message function On/Off.
Option
Auto Search
Auto Keystone
Auto on
Turns the Automatic signal search function On/Off.
Turns the Automatic keystone distortion correction function On/Off.
Turns the Auto on function On/Off.
Configures the timer to shut off the projector when no signal
is detected.
Auto off
Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON1 buttons on the
included remote control.
My Button-1
Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON2 buttons on the
included remote control.
My Button-2
Auto Adjust
Enables/Disables Auto Adjustment.
Remote Freq. Normal Enable/Disable
Remote Freq. High Enable/Disable
ꢀ4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Projector Control
Projector Status
Displays and configures the current projector status.
Item
Error Status
Description
Displays the current error status
Lamp Time
Filter Time
Power Status
Input Status
Blank On/Off
Mute
Displays the usage time for the current lamp.
Displays the usage time for the current filter.
Displays the current power status.
Displays the current input signal source.
Displays the Blank On/Off status.
Displays the current Mute On/Off status.
Displays the current Freeze On/Off status.
Freeze
Network Restart
Restarts the projector’s network connection.
Item
Description
Restarts the projector’s network connection in order to
activate new configuration settings.
Restart
NOTE • Restarting requires you to re-log on in order to further control or
configure the projector via a web browser.
Logoff
When logoff is clicked, the logon screen is displayed ( 6 : Fig. ꢁ).
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Failure & Warning Alerts via E-mail
Failure & Warning Alerts via E-mail
The projector can automatically send an alert to specified e-mail addresses when
the projector requires maintenance or has encountered an error.
NOTE • Up to five e-mail addresses can be specified.
• The projector may be not able to send e-mail if the projector suddenly loses
power.
Mail Settings
(
10)
To use the projector’s e-mail function please configure the following items via a
web browser.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
ꢁ) Enter [https://192.168.1.10] into the address bar of the web browser.
ꢀ) Enter the Administrator ID and Password and click [Logon].
3) Click [Port Settings] on the main menu.
4) Click the [Enable] check box to open the SMTP Port.
5) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the SMTP Port configuration
settings have changed. Click [Network Restart] and configure the following
items.
6) Click [Mail Settings] and configure each item. Refer to the [Mail Settings]
item in [Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser] for
further information.
ꢂ) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • Click the [Send Test Mail] button in [Mail Settings] to confirm
that the e-mail settings are correct. The following mail will be delivered to the
specified addresses.
Subject line : Test Mail
<Projector name>
Text
: Send Test Mail
Date
<Testing date>
Time
<Testing time>
IP Address
<Projector IP address>
MAC Address <Projector MAC address>
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Failure & Warning Alerts via E-mail
Mail Settings (Continued)
8) Configure the Failure/Warning Alerts via E-mail settings. Click [Alert Settings]
on the main menu.
9) Select and configure each alert item. Refer to [Alert Settings] in [Configuring
and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser] for further information.
10) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
Failure/Warning e-mails are formatted as follows:
Subject line : <Mail title>
<Projector name>
Text
: <Mail text>
Date
<Failure/Warning date>
<Failure/Warning time>
<Projector IP address>
Time
IP Address
MAC Address <Projector MAC address>
ꢀꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Projector management via SNMP
Projector management via SNMP
When SNMP is enabled, the projector is able to send Failure/Warning Alerts to a
specified PC.
NOTE • It is recommended that SNMP functions be carried out by a network
administrator.
• SNMP management software must be installed on the computer to monitor
the projector via SNMP.
SNMP settings
(
9)
Configure the following items via a web browser to use SNMP.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
ꢁ) Enter [https://192.168.1.10] into the address bar of the web browser.
ꢀ) Enter the Administrator ID and Password and click [Logon].
3) Click [Port Settings] on the main menu.
4) Click the [Enable] check box to open the SNMP Port.
Set the IP address to send the SNMP Trap to when a Failure/Warning occurs.
NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the SNMP Trap configuration
settings have been changed. Click [Network Restart] and configure the
following items.
5) Click [Security Settings] on the main menu.
6) Click [SNMP] and set the Community Name on the screen that is displayed.
NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the Community Name has been
changed.
• Click [Network Restart] and configure the following items.
7) Configure the settings for Trap transmission of Failures/Warnings. Click
[Alert Settings] on the main menu and select the Failure/Warning item to be
configured.
ꢃ) Click the [Enable] check box to send out the SNMP trap for Failures/Warnings.
Clear the [Enable] check box when SNMP trap transmission is not required.
9) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
ꢀꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the Projector via Scheduling
Controlling the Projector via Scheduling
The projector can be automatically controlled via scheduling.
NOTE • You can schedule the following control events: Power ON/OFF, Input
Source and Transferred Image Display.
• There are 3 types of Scheduling, 1) daily 2) day of the week 3) specific date.
• The priority for scheduled events is as follows 1) specific date 2) day of the
week 3) daily.
• Up to five specific dates are available for scheduled events. Priority is given to
those with the lower numbers when more than one event has been scheduled
for the same date and time (e.g., ‘Specific day No. 1’ has priority over ‘Specific
day No. ꢀ’ and so on.
• Be sure to set the date and time before enabling scheduled events.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the Projector via Scheduling
Date/Time Settings
(
18)
The Date/Time setting can be adjusted via a web browser.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
ꢁ) Enter [https://192.168.1.10] into the address bar of the web browser.
Enter the Administrator ID and Password and click [Logon].
ꢀ) Click [Date/Time Settings] on the main menu and configure each item.
Refer to the [Date/Time Settings] item in [Configuring and Controlling the
Projector via a Web Browser] for further information.
3) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the Daylight Savings Time or
SNTP configuration settings have been changed.
• The battery for the built in clock may be dead if the clock loses time even
when the DATE and TIME have been set correctly. Replace the battery by
following the instructions on replacing the battery.
(User's Manual - Operating Guide : Replacing Internal Clock battery)
• The Internal Clock’s time may not remain accurate. Using SNTP is
recommended to maintain accurate time.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the Projector via Scheduling
Schedule Settings
(
16)
Schedule settings can be configured from a web browser.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
ꢁ) Enter [https://192.168.1.10] into the address bar of the web browser.
ꢀ) Enter the Administrator ID and Password and click [Logon].
3) Click [Schedule Settings] on the main menu and select the required schedule
item.
4) Click the [Enable] check box to enable scheduling.
5) Enter the Date (Month/Day) for specific date scheduling.
6) Click [Add] and set the hour, command and parameters and click [Add This
Schedule] when you want to add a command.
ꢂ) Click the [Delete] button when you want to delete a schedule.
ꢃ) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
There are three types of scheduling.
1) Daily: Perform the specified operation at a specified time every day.
2) Sunday ~ Saturday: Perform the specified operation at the specified time on a
specified day of the week.
3) Specific Date: Perform the specified operation on the specified date and time.
NOTE • In Standby mode the power indicator will flash green for approx. 3
seconds when at least 1 “Power ON” schedule is saved.
• When the schedule function is used, the power cord must be connected to
the projector and the outlet and the power switch must be turned on, [ | ]. The
schedule function does not work when the power switch is turned off, [¡] or
the breaker in a room is tripped. The power indicator will lights orange or green
when the projector gets is receiving the power.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e-Shot (Still Image Transfer) Display
e-Shot (Still Image Transfer) Display
The projector can display a still image that is transferred via the network.
Communication Port
The following port is used for e-Shot.
TCP #9716
(9)
NOTE • e-Shot is not available via communication ports which are used for
the command control (TCP #23 and TCP #9715).
e-Shot (Still Image Transfer) Settings
Configure the following items from a web browser when e-Shot is used.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
ꢁ) Enter [https://192.168.1.10] into the address bar of the web browser.
ꢀ) Enter the Administrator ID and Password and
click [Logon].
3) Click [Port settings] on the main menu.
4) Click the [Enable] check box to open the
[Image Transfer Port (Port: 9716)]. Click the
[Enable] check box for the [Authentication]
setting when authentication is required,
otherwise clear the check box.
5) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e-Shot (Still Image Transfer) Display
e-Shot (Still Image Transfer) Settings (Continued)
When the authentication setting is enabled, the following settings are required.
6) Click [Security Settings] on the main menu.
ꢂ) Select [Network Control] and enter the desired authentication password. *
see Noteꢁ
ꢃ) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings. * see Noteꢀ
NOTE1 • The Authentication Password will be the same for [Network Control
Port1 (Port: 23)], [Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715)], and [Image Transfer
Port (Port: 9716)].
NOTE2 • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the
network. Restart the network connection when any configuration settings are
changed. The network connection can be restarted using [Network Restart] on
the main menu.
e-Shot (Still Image Transfer) Transmission
e-Shot transmission requires an exclusive application for your PC. You can
download it from the Hitachi web site. Refer to the manual for the application for
instructions.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Control via the Network
Command Control via the Network
You can configure and control the projector via the network using RS-232C
commands.
Communication Port
The following two ports are assigned for the command control.
TCP #23
TCP #9715
NOTE • Command control is not available via communication port (TCP
#9716) that is used for the e-Shot transmission function.
Command Control Settings
(
9)
Configure the following items from a web browser when command control is used.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
ꢁ) Enter [https://192.168.1.10] into the address bar of the web browser.
ꢀ) Enter the Administrator ID and Password and click [Logon].
3) Click [Port settings] on the main menu.
4) Click the [Enable] check box to open [Network Control Port (Port: 23)] to use
TCP #23. Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting when
authentication is required, otherwise clear the check box.
5) Click the [Enable] check box to open [Network Control Port (Port: 9715)] to
use TCP #9715. Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting
when authentication is required, otherwise clear the check box.
6) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Control via the Network
Command Control Settings (Continued)
When the authentication setting is enabled, the following settings are required.
(20)
ꢂ) Click [Security Settings] on the main menu.
ꢃ) Click [Network Control] and enter the desired authentication password. * See
Noteꢁ.
9) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings. * See Noteꢀ.
NOTE1 • The Authentication Password will be the same for [Network Control
Port1 (Port: 23)], [Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715)], and [Image Transfer
Port (Port: 9716)].
NOTE2 • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the
network. Restart the network when any configuration settings are changed.
The network connection can be restarted using [Network Restart] on the main
menu.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Control via the Network
Command format
Command formats differ among the different communication ports.
TCP #23
You can use the RS-232C commands without any changes. The reply data format
is the same as the RS-232C commands. However, the following reply will be sent
back in the event of authentication failure when authentication is enabled.
<Reply in the event of an authentication error>
Reply
Error code
0x04 0x00
0x1F
TCP #9715
Send Data format
The following formatting is added to the header (0x02), Data length (0x0D),
Checksum (1byte) and Connection ID (1 byte) of the RS-232C commands.
Data
length
Connection
Header
RS-232Ccommand
Checksum
ID
0x02
0x0D
13 bytes
ꢁ byte
ꢁ byte
Header
Data length
RS-232C commands → RS-232C commands that start with 0xBE 0xEF (13 bytes)
→ 0x02, Fixed
→ RS-232C commands byte length (0x0D, Fixed)
Check Sum
→ This is the value to make zero on the addition of the lower
ꢃ bits from the header to the checksum.
→ Random value from 0 to 255 (This value is attached to
the reply data)
Connection ID
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Control via the Network
Reply Data format
The connection ID (the data is same as the connection ID data on the sending
data format) is attached to the RS-232C commands reply data.
<ACK reply>
Connection
Reply
ID
0x06
ꢁ byte
<NAK reply>
Connection
ID
Reply
0x15
ꢁ byte
<Error reply>
Connection
ID
Reply
0x1C
Error code
ꢀ bytes
ꢁ byte
<Data reply>
Connection
ID
Reply
Data
0x1D
ꢀ bytes
ꢁ byte
<Projector busy reply>
Connection
ID
Reply
Status code
ꢀ bytes
0x1F
ꢁ byte
<Authentication error reply>
Authentication
Reply
Connection
ID
Error code
0x1F
0x04
0x00
ꢁ byte
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Control via the Network
Automatic Connection Break
The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no
communication for 30 seconds after being established.
Authentication
The projector does not accept commands without authentication success
when authentication is enabled. The projector uses a challenge response type
authentication with an MD5 (Message Digest 5) algorithm.
When the projector is using a LAN, a random eight bytes will be returned if
authentication is enabled. Bind this received ꢃ bytes and the authentication
password and digest this data with the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the
commands to send.
Following is a sample if the authentication password is set to “password” and the
random eight bytes are “a572f60c”.
ꢁ) Select the projector.
2) Receive the random eight bytes “a572f60c” from the projector.
3) Bind the random eight bytes “a572f60c” and the authentication password
“password” and it becomes “a572f60cpassword”.
4) Digest this bind “a572f60cpassword” with MD5 algorithm.
It will be “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”.
5) Add this “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde” in front of the commands and
send the data.
Send “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”+command.
6) When the sending data is correct, the command will be performed and the
reply data will be returned. Otherwise, an authentication error will be returned.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio Visual Products
Dukane Corporation
Audio Visual Products Division
2900 Dukane Drive
Phone: (630) 762-4040
Orders: (800) 676-2485
Fax: (630) 584-5156
St. Charles, IL 60174-3395
E-mail: [email protected]
Parts & Service: (800) 676-2487
Fax: (630) 584-0984
Part # 401-8776/8776RJ-01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|